WO2006066126A2 - Phenol-heterocyclic ligands, metal complexes, and their uses as catalysts - Google Patents

Phenol-heterocyclic ligands, metal complexes, and their uses as catalysts Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2006066126A2
WO2006066126A2 PCT/US2005/045766 US2005045766W WO2006066126A2 WO 2006066126 A2 WO2006066126 A2 WO 2006066126A2 US 2005045766 W US2005045766 W US 2005045766W WO 2006066126 A2 WO2006066126 A2 WO 2006066126A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
group
ligand
aryl
formula
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2005/045766
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2006066126A3 (en
Inventor
Margarete K. Leclerc
Xiahong Bei
James Longmire
Gary M. Diamond
James A. W. Shoemaker
Anne M. Lapointe
Lily Ackerman
Original Assignee
Symyx Technologies, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Symyx Technologies, Inc. filed Critical Symyx Technologies, Inc.
Publication of WO2006066126A2 publication Critical patent/WO2006066126A2/en
Publication of WO2006066126A3 publication Critical patent/WO2006066126A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D271/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D271/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D271/061,2,4-Oxadiazoles; Hydrogenated 1,2,4-oxadiazoles
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/22Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07FACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F7/00Compounds containing elements of Groups 4 or 14 of the Periodic System
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07FACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F7/00Compounds containing elements of Groups 4 or 14 of the Periodic System
    • C07F7/003Compounds containing elements of Groups 4 or 14 of the Periodic System without C-Metal linkages
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F10/00Homopolymers and copolymers of unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F12/00Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by an aromatic carbocyclic ring
    • C08F12/02Monomers containing only one unsaturated aliphatic radical
    • C08F12/04Monomers containing only one unsaturated aliphatic radical containing one ring
    • C08F12/06Hydrocarbons
    • C08F12/08Styrene
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F110/00Homopolymers of unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond
    • C08F110/04Monomers containing three or four carbon atoms
    • C08F110/06Propene
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F110/00Homopolymers of unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond
    • C08F110/14Monomers containing five or more carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F210/00Copolymers of unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbons having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond
    • C08F210/16Copolymers of ethene with alpha-alkenes, e.g. EP rubbers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F4/00Polymerisation catalysts
    • C08F4/42Metals; Metal hydrides; Metallo-organic compounds; Use thereof as catalyst precursors
    • C08F4/44Metals; Metal hydrides; Metallo-organic compounds; Use thereof as catalyst precursors selected from light metals, zinc, cadmium, mercury, copper, silver, gold, boron, gallium, indium, thallium, rare earths or actinides
    • C08F4/60Metals; Metal hydrides; Metallo-organic compounds; Use thereof as catalyst precursors selected from light metals, zinc, cadmium, mercury, copper, silver, gold, boron, gallium, indium, thallium, rare earths or actinides together with refractory metals, iron group metals, platinum group metals, manganese, rhenium technetium or compounds thereof
    • C08F4/62Refractory metals or compounds thereof
    • C08F4/64Titanium, zirconium, hafnium or compounds thereof
    • C08F4/659Component covered by group C08F4/64 containing a transition metal-carbon bond
    • C08F4/65908Component covered by group C08F4/64 containing a transition metal-carbon bond in combination with an ionising compound other than alumoxane, e.g. (C6F5)4B-X+
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F4/00Polymerisation catalysts
    • C08F4/42Metals; Metal hydrides; Metallo-organic compounds; Use thereof as catalyst precursors
    • C08F4/44Metals; Metal hydrides; Metallo-organic compounds; Use thereof as catalyst precursors selected from light metals, zinc, cadmium, mercury, copper, silver, gold, boron, gallium, indium, thallium, rare earths or actinides
    • C08F4/60Metals; Metal hydrides; Metallo-organic compounds; Use thereof as catalyst precursors selected from light metals, zinc, cadmium, mercury, copper, silver, gold, boron, gallium, indium, thallium, rare earths or actinides together with refractory metals, iron group metals, platinum group metals, manganese, rhenium technetium or compounds thereof
    • C08F4/62Refractory metals or compounds thereof
    • C08F4/64Titanium, zirconium, hafnium or compounds thereof
    • C08F4/659Component covered by group C08F4/64 containing a transition metal-carbon bond
    • C08F4/65912Component covered by group C08F4/64 containing a transition metal-carbon bond in combination with an organoaluminium compound

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to ligands, ligand-metal compositions, complexes, and catalysts useful in the polymerization of olefins and other transformations.
  • Ancillary (or spectator) ligand-metal coordination complexes are useful as catalysts, additives, stoichiometric reagents, solid-state precursors, therapeutic reagents and drugs.
  • Ancillary ligand-metal coordination complexes of this type can be prepared by combining an ancillary ligand with a suitable metal compound or metal precursor in a suitable solvent at a suitable temperature.
  • the ancillary ligand contains functional groups that bind to the metal center(s), remain associated with the metal center(s), and therefore provide an opportunity to modify the steric, electronic and chemical properties of the active metal center(s) of the complex.
  • Certain known ancillary ligand-metal complexes and compositions are catalysts for reactions such as oxidation, reduction, hydrogenation, hydrosilylation, hydrocyanation, hydroformylation, polymerization, carbonylation, isomerization, metathesis, carbon-hydrogen activation, carbon-halogen activation, cross-coupling, Friedel-Crafts acylation and alkylation, hydration, Diels-Alder reactions and other transformations.
  • ancillary ligand-metal complexes and compositions are in the field of polymerization catalysis.
  • the ancillary ligand typically offers opportunities to modify the electronic and/or steric environment surrounding an active metal center. This allows the ancillary ligand to assist in the creation of possibly different polymers.
  • Group 4 metallocene based single site catalysts are generally known for polymerization reactions. See, generally, “Chemistry of Cationic Dicyclopentadienyl Group 4 Metal-Alkyl Complexes", Jordan, Adv. Organometallic Chem. 1991, 32,325-153, and the references therein, all of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • metallocene catalysts One application for metallocene catalysts is producing isotactic polypropylene.
  • An extensive body of scientific literature examines catalyst structures, mechanism and polymers prepared by metallocene catalysts. See, e.g., Resconi et al., "Selectivity in Propene Polymerization with Metallocene Catalysts," Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1253-1345 and G.W. Coates, "Precise Control of Polyolefin Stereochemistry Using Single-Site Metal Catalysts," Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1223-1252 and the references cited in these review articles.
  • Isotactic polypropylene has historically been produced with heterogeneous catalysts that may be described as a catalyst on a solid support (e.g., titanium tetrachloride and aluminum alkyls and additional modifiers or "donors" on magnesium dichloride).
  • This process typically uses hydrogen to control the molecular weight and electron-donor compounds to control the isotacticity. See also EP 0 622 380, EP 0 292 134 and U.S. Patents 4,971,936, 5,093,415, 4,297,465, 5,385,993 and 6,239,236.
  • the invention features ligands, compositions and metal complexes that are useful in catalysts for olefin polymerization and other transformations, as well as methods for preparing the ligands and for using the compositions or complexes in catalytic transformations such as olefin polymerization,
  • the ligands have a phenol- heterocyclic structure, as will be discussed in more detail below.
  • Catalysts according to the invention can be provided by compositions including a ligand, a metal precursor, and optionally an activator, combination of activators, or an activator technique.
  • catalysts can be provided by metal-ligand complexes and optionally may additionally include an activator, combination of activators or activator technique.
  • the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (I):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 and R 7 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, tliioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R 1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R 5 , R 6 and R 7 may be joined to form a fused ring
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O
  • X 3 is O
  • X 4 is O
  • each n ⁇ n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided combinations of X 1 , X 2 ; X 1 , X 3 ; and X 1 , X 4 are not both N and X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are not all N.
  • Additional compounds that are not included are those where X 1 , X 3 , X 4 are each N, X 2 is C, R 5 is H and R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t- butyl, -CMe 2 Et, -C(Et) 3 , -CMe 2 Ph, -C(Ph) 3 , -Si(Et) 3 , and -Si(Ph) 3 , and when R 1 is F, R 3 is F, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 are all C, X 4 is N, R 5 , R 6 are each H and R 7 is t-butyl.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl and in particular, R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R 7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is O
  • X 3 is N
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ia).
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is N
  • X 3 is O
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ib).
  • R 1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is NR 5
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ic).
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is S
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Id)
  • R 1 is an aryl, substituted aryl, alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is a hydrogen
  • R 7 is bromide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, naplithyl, substituted naphthyl, anthracenyl, substituted anthracenyl, or a hydrogen.
  • X4s C, X 2 is CR 5 , X 3 is S and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ie).
  • R 1 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or .a substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • X 1 is N
  • X 2 is CR 5
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (If).
  • R 1 is an aryl or substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen
  • R 6 is a hydrogen
  • R 7 is an alkyl or phenyl.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is CR 5
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is NR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ig).
  • R 1 is a halogen.
  • R 2 is a hydrogen or methyl.
  • R 3 is a halogen.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen.
  • R 6 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 1 and R 3 are not both F and R 7 is not t- butyl.
  • X 1 is C, X 2 is CR 5 , X 3 is NR 6 and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Di).
  • X 1 is C, X 2 is O, X 3 is CR 6 and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ii).
  • X 1 Is C, X 2 is CR 5 , X 3 is O and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ij).
  • Preferred R groups for these additional embodiments are cliosed from those disclosed for formula (I) through (Ig).
  • compositions of matter including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (II):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 are the same or different and are each independent of one another and are as described above.
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is N or CR 5
  • X 3 is N or CR 6
  • X 4 is N or CR 7
  • the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic
  • R 5 , R 6 and R 7 are each H and R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe 2 Et, -C(Et) 3 , -CMe 2 Ph, - C(Ph) 3 , -Si(Et) 3 , and -Si(Ph) 3 , are not included.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, tliioplienyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothioplienyl.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothioplienyl and substituted benzothiophenyl
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R 7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
  • CR 6 and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ha).
  • formulae (Ha) In one aspect of formula (Ha),
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is a disubstituted phenyl group, and in particular, a 2,6 disubstituted phenyl group.
  • compositions of matter including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (III):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R 1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R 8 , R 9 , R 10 and R 11
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O, S, N(R 5 ) n > or CR 5 , wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided X 1 and X 2 are not both N.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, ⁇ substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is NR 5 and are referred to as formulae (Ilia).
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • X 1 is C and X 2 is S and are referred to as formulae (HIb).
  • R 1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 1 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • compositions of matter including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (FV):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are the same or different and are each independent of each other and are as described above.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is N or CR 5 , provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
  • X 1 is C and X 2 is N and are referred to as formulae (IVa).
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or an alkoxy.
  • R 10 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, or a substituted alkyl.
  • the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (V):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are the same or different and are each, independent of each other and are as described above.
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O, S, N(R 5 ) n . or CR 5 , wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided when X 1 and X 2 are both N, then:
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is /-propyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 and R 11 are each H;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 1,1-dimethylpropyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is 1,1-dimethylpropyl
  • R 11 are each H
  • R 1 is isopropylbenzyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is isopropylbenzyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is F;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 11 are each H
  • R 9 and R 10 are each F;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 11 are each H
  • R 9 and R 10 are each Cl
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is -
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is -
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 11 are each H
  • R 9 and R 10 is are each Me
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -OMe
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is phenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 2,4,6-trimethyl ⁇ henyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 1-naphthyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 9-anthracenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H
  • R 10 is
  • R 1 is 3,5-difluorophenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and
  • R 10 is Cl
  • R 1 is an alkyldiarylsilyl or dialkylarylsilyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl; not included.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
  • compositions according to the invention can include a metal precursor or activated metal precursor including a metal selected from groups 3-6 and the lanthanide series of the periodic table of elements, and one or more optional activators.
  • the metal precursor can be a compound characterized by the general formula M(L) m , where M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3-6 and lanthanides of the periodic table of elements, and each L is a ligand independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate,
  • two or more L groups can be joined into a ring structure,
  • one or more of the ligands L can be ionically bonded to the metal M.
  • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • M can be Ti, Zr, and Hf.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VI): where M, L and X 1 are as described above with the broken bonds representing the compounds having formulae (I) through (Ig), (III) through (HId) and (V) as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
  • formulae (VI) includes those compounds having formulae (II), (Ha) and (IV) as described above, the nitrogen includes a hydrogen, and m' and x are as described above.
  • the dashed bond shown between the nitrogen atom with M depicted in formula (VI) can be dative, nonexistent, or covalent.
  • the phrase the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent is used to indicate additionally that the bond may attach or detach such that the bond fluxuates between dative and absent.
  • the complex may include more than one metal (M) and one or more ligands, each independent of one another, and the ligand to metal ratio may be fractional.
  • Particular embodiments can include one or more of the following features.
  • the complex can be characterized by the formula (VII):
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VIII):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (II) and (Ha), M and L are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is ⁇ , 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • R 7 is a disubstituted phenyl group, and in particular, a 2,6 disubstituted phenyl group.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (IX):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , X 1 and X 2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (III) through formulae (HId), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3,, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (X): where R 1 , R z , R ⁇ , R ⁇ R ⁇ R 6 , R y , R i ⁇ , R 11 , X 1 and X z are as described above for compounds of formulae (IV) and (IVa), M and L are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (XI):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , X 1 and X 2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (V), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is
  • R 1 and R 7 can be thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, carbazole, substituted carbazoles, indoles and substituted indoles.
  • the invention provides bis-ligand complexes, as well as compositions where the ratio of metal to ligand is about one to two.
  • these bis-ligand systems are those where x is 2 in any of the above metal complex formulae, and in other embodiments, the bis-ligand systems have one ancillary ligand as described in the above formulae and a second ancillary ligand that can generally be within the definition of L.
  • a bis-ligand complex can be
  • each R , R , R , R , R , R , R are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R 5 , R 6 and R 7 on the same ring In the exception that R may not be hydrogen,
  • X 7 is O, S, N(R 6 ) n - or CR 6
  • X 8 is O, S, N(R 7 ) n - or CR 7 , wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; and further provided that in the selection of the C, N, O or S atom, at least, either X 1 and X 5 are different or X 2 and X 6 are different or X 3 and X 7 are different or X 4 and X 8 are different; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl
  • the invention provides arrays of materials.
  • the arrays include a substrate having at least 8 members associated with regions of the substrate. Each array member is different from the other members of the array. Each array member includes a compound, composition or complex according to one of the aspects described above.
  • the invention provides catalytic methods.
  • one or more reagents is reacted in the presence of a catalyst comprising a composition or complex as described above, and optionally one or more activators, under conditions sufficient to yield one or more reaction products.
  • the invention provides polymerization processes that employ the composition or complexes of the invention, optionally in the presence of at least one activator.
  • the activator can include an ion forming activator and, optionally, a group 13 reagent.
  • the activator can include an alumoxane.
  • the invention provides a process for the polymerization of an alpha-olefin.
  • at least one alpha-olefin is polymerized in the presence of a catalyst formed from a composition or complex of the invention, optionally in the presence of one or more activators, under polymerization conditions sufficient to form a substantially stereoregular polymer.
  • the invention provides a process for polymerizing ethylene and at least one alpha-olefin.
  • ethylene is polymerized in the presence of at least one alpha-olefin in the presence of a catalyst formed from a composition or complex of the invention, optionally in the presence of one or more activators.
  • the at least one alpha-olefin can include propylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 1-octene, 1-decene, styrene or substituted styrene.
  • the process can be a solution process, and can be operated under polymerization conditions that include a temperature of at least 100°C, or at least 125°C.
  • the invention provides a process for polymerizing at least one monomer.
  • the process includes providing a reactor with reactor contents including at least one polymerizable monomer and a composition or complex of the invention, and subjecting the reactor contents to polymerization conditions.
  • the at least one polymerizable monomer can include ethylene and propylene, ethylene and 1-hexene, ethylene and 1-butene, 1-octene, 1-decene, ethylene and styrene, ethylene and a cyclic alkene, ethylene and a diene, or ethylene, propylene, and a diene selected from the group consisting of ethylidenenorbornene, dicyclopentadiene, and 1,4-hexadiene.
  • the invention provides a process for the polymerization of a polymerizable monomer.
  • a composition or complex of the invention is provided, the composition or complex is optionally activated, and at least one polymerizable monomer is polymerized in the presence of the activated composition or complex to produce a distribution of product polymers that is at least bimodal by one or more of molecular weight or composition.
  • the invention can be implemented to provide one or more of the following advantages.
  • the ligands, compositions, complexes and polymerization methods of the invention can be used to provide catalysts exhibiting enhanced activity.
  • Catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and/or complexes can be used to catalyze a variety of transformations, such as olefin oligomerization (specifically dimerization, trimerization and tetramerization) or polymerization.
  • olefin oligomerization specifically dimerization, trimerization and tetramerization
  • polymerization By selecting an appropriate ligand and metal, compositions and/or complexes can be obtained to provide for desired properties in the resulting product.
  • polymers produced using the ligands, compositions, complexes, and methods of the invention can exhibit higher (or lower) melting points, higher (or lower) molecular weights, and/or higher (or lower) polydispersities, than polymers produced using prior known catalysts.
  • polymer products having bi- or multi-modal distributions of product composition and/or molecular weight can be obtained by selecting a single catalyst precursor and activating it under certain conditions.
  • Catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and/or complexes can be used according to the polymerization methods of the invention to produce polymers under commercially desirable polymerization conditions.
  • Catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and complexes of the invention can exhibit catalytic activity at higher temperatures than prior known catalysts.
  • compositions and complexes of the invention can exhibit higher (or lower) comonomer incorporation than processes involving prior known catalysts.
  • Chiral compositions and/or complexes according to the invention can be used to catalyze stereoselective, enantioselective or diastereoselective transformations.
  • Figure 1 is an X-ray structure determination of complex M1 of the invention.
  • Figure 2 is a list of certain ligands that comprise Tables 1-7, in accord with the invention herein.
  • Figure 3 is a list of certain metal-ligand complexes in accord with the inventions herein.
  • the invention provides ligands, compositions and complexes that are useful as catalysts for a variety of transformations, including olefin polymerization reactions.
  • the phrase "characterized by the formula” is not intended to be limiting and is used in the same way that "comprising” is commonly used.
  • the term “independently selected” is used herein to indicate that the groups in question ⁇ e.g., R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , etc. - can be identical or different (e.g., R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , etc.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be a substituted alkyl and R 3 may be an aryl, etc.).
  • R 1 and R 2 may be a substituted alkyl and R 3 may be an aryl, etc.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be a substituted alkyl and R 3 may be an aryl, etc.
  • R 3 may be an aryl, etc.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be a substituted alkyl and R 3 may be an aryl, etc.
  • R 3 may be an aryl, etc.
  • substituted as in “substituted hydrocarbyl,” “substituted aryl,” “substituted alkyl,” and the like, means that in the group in question ⁇ i.e., the hydrocarbyl, alkyl, aryl or other moiety that follows the term), at least one hydrogen atom bound to a carbon atom is replaced with one or more substituent groups such as hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, phosphino, amino, halo, silyl, and the like.
  • substituent groups such as hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, phosphino, amino, halo, silyl, and the like.
  • substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl is to be interpreted as “substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl and substituted alkynyl.”
  • optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl is to be interpreted as “optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl and optionally substituted alkynyl.”
  • saturated refers to the lack of double and triple bonds between atoms of a radical group such as ethyl, cyclohexyl, pyrrolidinyl, and the like.
  • unsaturated refers to the presence of one or more double and triple bonds between atoms of a radical group such as vinyl, allyl, acetylide, oxazolinyl, cyclohexenyl, acetyl and the like, and specifically includes alkenyl and alkynyl groups, as well as groups in which double bonds are delocalized, as in aryl and heteroaryl groups as defined below.
  • cyclo and cyclic are used herein to refer to saturated or unsaturated radicals containing a single ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • Suitable cyclic moieties include, for example, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctenyl, bicyclooctyl, phenyl, napthyl, pyrrolylj furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, and the like,
  • cyclic moieties include between 3 and 200 atoms other than hydrogen, between 3 and 50 atoms other than hydrogen or between 3 and 20 atoms other than hydrogen.
  • hydrocarbyl refers to hydrocarbyl radicals containing 1 to about 50 carbon atoms, specifically 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, most specifically 1 to about 16 carbon atoms, including branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated species, such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, and the like.
  • alkyl refers to a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 1 to about 50 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, ⁇ -propyl, isopropyl, «-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, octyl, decyl, and the like, as well as cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkyl groups herein may contain 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkenyl refers to a branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 2 to about 50 carbon atoms and at least one double bond, such as ethenyl, r ⁇ -propenyl, isopropenyl, n- butenyl, isobutenyl, octenyl, decenyl, and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkenyl groups herein contain 2 to about 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkynyl refers to a branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 2 to about 50 carbon atoms and at least one triple bond, such as ethynyl, n-propynyl, isopropynyl, n- butynyl, isobutynyl, octynyl, decynyl, and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkynyl groups herein may have 2 to about 20 carbon atoms.
  • aromatic is used in its usual sense, including unsaturation that is essentially delocalized across several bonds around a ring.
  • aryl refers to a group containing an aromatic ring.
  • Aryl groups herein include groups containing a single aromatic ring or multiple aromatic rings that are fused together, linked covalently, or linked to a common group such as a methylene or ethylene moiety. More specific aryl groups contain one aromatic ring or two or three fused or linked aromatic rings, e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, anthracenyl, or phenanthrenyl.
  • aryl substituents include 1 to about 200 atoms other than hydrogen, typically 1 to about 50 atoms other than hydrogen, and specifically 1 to about 20 atoms other than hydrogen,
  • multi-ring moieties are substituents and in such embodiments the multi-ring moiety can be attached at an appropriate atom.
  • naphthyl can be 1 -naphthyl or 2-naphthyl
  • anthracenyl can be 1 -anthracenyl, 2-anthracenyl or 9-anthracenyl
  • phenanthrenyl can be 1 -phenanthrenyl, 2-phenanthrenyl, 3 -phenanthrenyl, 4-phenanthrenyl or 9- phenanthrenyl.
  • alkoxy as used herein intends an alkyl group bound through a single, terminal ether linkage; that is, an "alkoxy" group may be represented as -O-alkyl where alkyl is as defined above.
  • aryloxy is used in a similar fashion, and may be represented as -O-aryl, with aryl as defined below.
  • hydroxy refers to -OH.
  • alkylthio intends an alkyl group bound through a single, terminal thioether linkage; that is, an "alkylthio” group may be represented as -S-alkyl where alkyl is as defined above.
  • arylthio is used similarly, and may be represented as -S-aryl, with aryl as defined below.
  • mercapto refers to -SH.
  • halo and halogen are used in the conventional sense to refer to a chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo radical.
  • heterocycle and “heterocyclic” refer to a cyclic radical, including ring-fused systems, including heteroaryl groups as defined below, in which one or more carbon atoms in a ring is replaced with a heteroatom - that is, an atom other than carbon, such as nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron or silicon.
  • Heterocycles and heterocyclic groups include saturated and unsaturated moieties, including heteroaryl groups as defined below.
  • heterocycles include pyrrolidine, pyrroline, furan, tetrahydrofuran, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, indole, and the like, including any isomers of these. Additional heterocycles are described, for example, in Alan R. Katritzky, Handbook of Heterocyclic Chemisti ⁇ , Pergammon Press, 1985, and in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, A.R. Katritzky et ah, eds, Elsevier, 2d. ed., 1996.
  • the term "metallocycle” refers to a heterocycle in which one or more of the heteroatoms in the ring or rings is a metal.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aryl radical that includes one or more heteroatoms in the aromatic ring.
  • Specific heteroaryl groups include groups containing heteroaromatic rings such as thiophene, pyridine, pyrazine, isoxazole, pyrazole, pyrrole, furan, thiazole, oxazole, imidazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, triazole, and benzo-fused analogues of these rings, such as indole, carbazole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazoles, indazole and the like and isomers thereof, e.g., reverse isomers.
  • heteroalkyl refers to a molecule or molecular fragment in which one or more carbon atoms is replaced with a heteroatom.
  • heteroalkyl refers to an alkyl substituent that is heteroatom-containing.
  • heteroatom-containing alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl is to be interpreted as “heteroatom-containing alkyl, heteroatom-contaming alkenyl and heteroatom-containing alkynyl.”
  • divalent as in “divalent hydrocarbyl”, “divalent alkyl”, “divalent aryl” and the like, is meant that the hydrocarbyl, alkyl, aryl or other moiety is bonded at two points to atoms, molecules or moieties with the two bonding points being covalent bonds.
  • silyl refers to the -SiZ 1 Z 2 Z 3 radical, where each of Z 1 , Z 2 , and Z 3 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroatom-containing alkyl, heteroatom- containing alkenyl, heteroatom-containing alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, silyl and combinations thereof.
  • boryl refers to the -BZ 1 Z 2 group, where each of
  • Z 1 and Z 2 is as defined above.
  • phosphino refers to the group -PZ Z , where each of Z and Z is as defined above.
  • phosphine refers to the group :PZ 1 Z 2 Z 3 , where each of Z 1 , Z 3 and Z 2 is as defined above.
  • amino is used herein to refer to the group -NZ 1 Z 2 , where each of Z 1 and Z 2 is as defined above.
  • amine is used herein to refer to the group INZ 1 Z 2 Z 3 , where each of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 is as defined above.
  • ligand binding is sometimes referred to as (2,1) complexation or (2,2) complexation, with the first number representing the number of coordinating atoms and second number representing the number of anionic sites on the phenol-heterocycle ligand, when the metal-ligand bonding is considered from an ionic bonding model perspective, with the metal considered to be cationic and the ligand considered to be anionic.
  • a (2,1) complex may be considered to be a complex in which the phenol-heterocycle ligand is bound to the metal center via one covalent bond and one dative bond
  • a (2,2) complex may be considered to be a complex in which the phenol-heterocycle ligand is bound to the metal' center via two covalent bonds.
  • Examples of (2,1) complexation include the complex examples labeled M1 through M30 as listed below.
  • a covalent bond or dative bond may be formed from R 1 , R 7 or R 11 to the metal, to form a (3,2) complex, or (3,1) complex respectively.
  • R 1 , R 7 or R 11 is an aryl or heteroaryl
  • C-H activation may occur to form a (3,2) complex
  • R 1 , R 7 or R 11 is a heteroatom-containing group
  • a dative bond may be found from heteroatom to metal to give a (3,1) complex.
  • the complexes can include "mono" ligand and
  • the ligands according to the invention can be characterized broadly as monoanionic ligands having a phenol and a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic group. Preferred ligand substituents for some particular monomers are described in more detail below.
  • the ligands of the invention can be characterized by the following (I):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R 1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R 5 , R 6 and R 7 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O, S, N(R 5 V or CR 5 ,
  • X 3 is O, S, N(R 6 V or CR 6
  • X 4 is O, S, N(R 7 V- or CR 7 , wherein each n ⁇ n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided combinations of X 1 , X 2 ; X 1 , X 3 ; and X 1 , X 4 are not both N and X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are not all N.
  • Additional compounds that are not included are those where X 1 , X 3 , X 4 are each N, X 2 is C, R 5 is H and R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t- butyl, -CMe 2 Et, -C(Et) 3 , -CMe 2 Ph, -C(Ph) 3 , -Si(Et) 3 , and -Si(Ph) 3 , and when R 1 is F, R 3 is F, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 are all C, X 4 is N, R 5 , R 6 are each H and R 7 is t-butyl. [00114] Additionally, the compounds and complexes disclosed in US Patent No.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl and in particular, R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R 7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
  • X 1 is C,
  • X 3 is N and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ia):
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ia) include those set out in Figure 2 as "A" ligands.
  • R 1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ib) includes those set out in Figure 2 as "B" ligands.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is NR 5
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ic):
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or a substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ic) include those set out in Figure 2 as "F" ligands.
  • R 1 is an aryl, substituted aryl; alkyl, substituted alkyl, heteroaryl or a substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is a halide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, anthracenyl, substituted anthracenyl, or a hydrogen.
  • Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Id) include those set out in Figure 5 as "C" ligands.
  • R 1 is an aryl, substituted aryl, hetroaryl or substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 1 is an aryl or substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen.
  • R 6 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (If) include those set out in Figure 2 as "G" ligands.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is CR 5
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is NR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Ig):
  • R 1 is a halogen.
  • R 2 is a hydrogen or methyl.
  • R 3 is a halogen.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen,
  • R 6 is a hydrogen,
  • R 7 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, formulae (Ig) do not include the compounds where R 1 and R 3 are fluorine and R 7 is a t-butyl.
  • compositions of matter including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (II):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 are each independent of one another and are as described above.
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is N or CR 5
  • X 3 is N or
  • CR 6 , X 4 is N or CR 7 , provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided that compounds when X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are each C, R 5 , R 6 and
  • R 7 are each H and R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe 2 Et, -C(Et) 3 , -
  • CMe 2 Ph, -C(Ph) 3 , -Si(Et) 3 , and -Si(Ph) 3 are not included.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothioplienyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R 7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or a substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ha) include those set out in Figure 2 as "E" ligands.
  • compositions of matter including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (III):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R 1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R 8 , R 9 , R 10 and R 11 may be joined to form
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O, S, N(R 5 ) n > or CR 5 , wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided X and X are not both N.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ilia) include FI l and F12 set forth in Figure 2.
  • X 2 is S and are referred to as formulae (HIb):
  • R 1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (HIb) include C29 those set forth in Figure 2.
  • X is CR and are referred to as formulae (HId):
  • R 1 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • Suitable example of a ligand within the scope of formula (HId) includes G4 set out in Figure 2.
  • the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (IV):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are each independent of each other and are as described above.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or an alkoxy.
  • R 10 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, or a substituted alkyl.
  • compositions of matter including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (V):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 are each independent of each other and are as described above.
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O, S, N(R 5 ) n - or CR 5 , wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided when X 1 and X 2 are both N, then:
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H
  • R 10 is
  • R 1 is i-propyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 and R 11 are each H;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 1,1-dimethylpropyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is 1,1-dimethylpro ⁇ yl
  • R 4 , R 8 , R 9 is 1,1-dimethylpro ⁇ yl
  • R 10 and R 11 are each H;
  • R 1 is isopropylbenzyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is isopropylbenzyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is F;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 11 are each H
  • R 9 and R 10 are each F
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is /-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 11 are each H
  • R 9 and R 10 are each Cl
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is -CF 3 ;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is -OMe;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 11 are each H
  • R 9 and R 10 is are each Me
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -OMe
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is phenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is t-butyl
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is t-butyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H
  • R 10 is
  • R 1 is 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 1-naphthyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and
  • R 10 is Cl
  • R 1 is 9-anthracenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl;
  • R 1 is 3,5-difluorophenyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 11 are each
  • R 1 is an alkyldiarylsilyl or dialkylarylsilyl
  • R 2 is H
  • R 3 is -Me
  • R 4 is H
  • R 8 is H
  • R 9 , R 11 are each H and R 10 is Cl; but
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl.
  • R 1 can be selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, N-carbazolyl, substituted N-carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzotliiophenyl.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl; more specifically, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
  • the choice of particular heterocyclic ligand can have a strong influence on the catalysis of particular transformations.
  • the choice of substituent in the ligands of the invention when incorporated in a polymerization catalyst can affect catalyst activity, thermal stability, molecular weight of the product polymer, or the degree and/or kind of stereo- or regioerrors, as well as other factors known to be significant in the production of various polymers.
  • Specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of polypropylene are specified in Tables 2C, 3 A and 3B. Additionally, specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of low molecular weight polypropylene waxes are specified in Table 3A, examples PP3-PP7, and Table 3B. Specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of ethlyene-1-octene copolymersare specified in Tables 3C and 3D. Specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of polystyene are specified in Tables 3E.
  • the ligands of the invention can be prepared using known procedures, such as those described, for example, in March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, Wiley, New York 1992 (4 th Ed.), and in Katritzky et al, Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, Elsevier, New York 1984 (1 st Ed.) & 1996 (2 nd Ed.). Specifically, in some embodiments the ligands of the invention can be prepared according to the general procedures that follow.
  • the desired ligand can be combined with a metal atom, ion, compound or other metal precursor compound, and in some embodiments the present invention encompasses compositions that include any of the above-mentioned ligands in combination with an appropriate metal precursor and an optional activator.
  • the metal precursor can be an activated metal precursor, which refers to a metal precursor (described below) that has been combined or reacted with an activator (described below) prior to combination or reaction with the ancillary ligand.
  • the invention provides compositions that include such combinations of ligand and metal atom, ion, compound or precursor.
  • the ligands are combined with a metal compound or precursor and the product of such combination is not determined, if a product forms.
  • the ligand may be added to a reaction vessel at the same time as the metal or metal precursor compound along with the reactants, activators, scavengers, etc.
  • the ligand can be modified prior to addition to or after the addition of the metal precursor, e.g. through a deprotonation reaction or some other modification.
  • the metal precursor compounds can be characterized by the general formula M(L) m where M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3-6 and lanthanides of the periodic table of elements and m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • M can be selected from scandium, yttrium, titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, samarium, europium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium, and lutetium.
  • Each L is a ligand independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof.
  • two or more L groups are joined into a ring structure.
  • L may be ionically bonded to the metal M and, for example, L may be a non-coordinated or loosely coordinated or weakly coordinated anion (e.g., L may be selected from the group consisting of those anions described below in the conjunction with the activators). (See Marks et al., Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1391-1434, for a detailed discussion of these weak interactions.)
  • the metal precursors may be monomeric, dimeric or higher orders thereof.
  • the metal precursor includes a metal selected from Ti, Zr, or Hf.
  • the metal precursor includes a metal selected from Zr and Hf.
  • Suitable titanium, hafnium and zirconium precursors include, but are not limited to TiCl 4 , Ti(CH 2 Ph) 4 , Ti(CH 2 CMe 3 ) 4 , Ti(CH 2 SiMe 3 ) 4 , Ti(CH 2 Ph) 3 Cl, Ti(CH 2 CMe 3 ) 3 Cl, Ti(CH 2 SiMe 3 ) 3 Cl, Ti(CH 2 Ph) 2 Cl 2 , Ti(CH 2 CMe 3 ) 2 Cl 2 , Ti(CH 2 SiMe 3 ) 2 Cl 2 , Ti(NMe 2 ) 4 , Ti(NEt 2 ) 4 , Ti(O- i Pr) 4 , and Ti(N(SiMe 3 ) 2 ) 2 Cl 2 ; HfCl 4 , Hf(CH 2 Ph) 4 , Hf(CH 2 CMe 3 ) 4 , Hf(CH 2 SiMe 3 ) 4 , Hf(CH 2 Ph) 3 Cl, Hf(CH 2 Ph) 3 Cl
  • Lewis base adducts of these examples are also suitable as metal precursors, for example, ethers, amines, thioethers, phosphines and the like are suitable as Lewis bases.
  • Specific examples include HfCl 4 (THF) 2 , HfCl 4 (SMe 2 ) 2 and Hf(CH 2 Ph) 2 Cl 2 (OEt 2 ).
  • Activated metal precursors may be ionic or zwitterionic compounds, such as [M(CH 2 Ph) 3 + ] [B(C 6 F 5 )_ ⁇ or [M(CH 2 Ph) 3 + ] [PhCH 2 B(C 6 Fs) 3 ⁇ l where M is Zr or Hf.
  • Activated metal precursors or such ionic compounds can be prepared in the manner shown in Pelleccliia et al., Organometallics 1994, 13, 298-302; Pellecchia et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc.
  • the ligand to metal precursor compound ratio is typically in the range of about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, more specifically in the range of about 0.1:1 to about 10:1 and even more specifically about 1:1, 2:1 or 3:1.
  • this invention relates to compositions of one or more ligands and a metal precursor compound, where the compositions include two equivalents of ligand to metal precursor compound, referred to herein as the bis- ligand embodiment.
  • the other aspects there is also a bis-ligand complex embodiment, specifically, those embodiments where x is 2 in the below complexation formulae.
  • the bis-ligand composition embodiment can include two equivalents of the same phenol- heterocycle ligand or one equivalent of a first phenol-heterocycle ligand and one equivalent of a second phenol-heterocycle ligand, wherein the first and second phenol- heterocycle ligands are different from each other.
  • the ratio of first phenol-heterocycle ligand to second phenol-heterocycle ligand is not one to one, but ranging from 1 to 99 parts to 99 to 1 parts.
  • the first phenol-heterocycle ligand is a ligand of this invention and the second phenol-heterocycle ligand is otherwise known.
  • the second phenol- heterocycle ligand can be a triazole ligand, such as those disclosed in US Patent 6,933,355, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Triazole ligands that may be used as second phenol-heterocycle ligands in bis-ligand compositions (and complexes) include those characterized by the general formula:
  • R 8 , R 9 , R 10 and R 11 are selected from the same groups as R 1 , R 2 ,
  • R 3 , and R 4 defined in the various embodiments above.
  • Specific examples of ligands that may be preferably used as second phenol-heterocycle ligands in bis-ligand are shown in the various examples and figures herein. See the following for general mixed ligand systems: J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2004, 126, 10798-10799; Chem. Common. 2005, 25, 3150- 3152; and Dalton Trans. 2005, 3611-3613, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the invention relates to metal- ligand complexes.
  • the ligand (or optionally a modified ligand as discussed above) is mixed with a suitable metal precursor (and optionally other components, such as activators) prior to or simultaneously with allowing the mixture to be contacted with the reactants (e.g., monomers).
  • a metal-ligand complex may be formed, which may itself be an active catalyst or may be transformed into a catalyst upon activation.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VI):
  • formulae (VI) includes those compounds having formulae (II), (Ha) and (IV) as described above, the nitrogen includes a hydrogen, and m' and x are as described above.
  • the dashed bond shown between the nitrogen atom with M depicted in formula (VI) can be dative, nonexistent, or covalent. When the bond is intended to be a dative bond, it is shown as a dashed arrow.
  • the bond between the nitrogen atom and the metal (M) may come on and off again, giving it fluxional behavior, and thus any of the formula here can be drawn without that bond.
  • compounds may include those of formula (Va) as one of the bis-ligand compounds.
  • the complex may include more than one metal (M) and one or more ligands, each independent of one another, and the ligand to metal ratio may be fractional.
  • Particular embodiments can include one or more of the following features.
  • the complex can be characterized by the formula (VII):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (I) through formulae (Ig); M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is O
  • X 3 is N
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Vila):
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • X 3 is CR 6 and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIc):
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIIc) include those set out in Table 3.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is S
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (VIId):
  • R 1 is an aryl, substituted aryl, alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is bromide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, anthracenyl, substituted anthracenyl, or a hydrogen.
  • ligands within the scope of formula (VIId) include those set out in Table 5.
  • X 1 is C
  • X 2 is
  • R 1 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 1 is an aryl or substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen.
  • R 6 is a hydrogen.
  • R 7 is an alkyl or phenyl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIIf) include those set out in Table 7. [00216] In an seventh embodiment for complexes having formula (VII), X 1 is C,
  • X 2 is CR 5
  • X 3 is CR 6
  • X 4 is NR 7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIg):
  • R 1 is a halogen.
  • R 2 is a hydrogen or methyl.
  • R 3 is a halogen.
  • R 5 is a hydrogen.
  • R is a hydrogen,
  • R 7 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, formulae (VIIg) do not include the compounds where R 1 and R 3 are fluorine and R 7 is a t-butyl.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VIII):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (II) and (Ha), M and L are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • X 3 is CR 6 and X 4 is CR 7 and are referred to as formulae (Villa):
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Villa) include those set out in Table 4.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (IX):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , X1 and X 2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (III) through formulae (HId), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between N and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IXa) include those set forth in Table 9.
  • X 2 is S and are referred to as formulae (IXb);
  • R 1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IXb) include those set forth in Table 11.
  • X 2 is CR 5 and are referred to as formulae (IXd):
  • R 1 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • R is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
  • Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IXd) include those set out in Table 13.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula :
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , X 1 and X 2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (IV) and (IVa), M and are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is ⁇ , 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • R 1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or an alkoxy.
  • R 10 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, or a substituted alkyl.
  • the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (XI):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , X 1 and X 2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (V), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between N and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
  • the ligands, complexes or catalysts may be supported on organic or inorganic supports. Suitable supports include silicas, aluminas, clays, zeolites, magnesium chloride, polystyrenes, substituted polystyrenes and the like. Polymeric supports may be cross-linked or not.
  • the ligands, complexes or catalysts may be supported on supports known to those of skill in the art. See for example, Severn et al. Chem. Rev. 2005, 105, 4073-4147, particularly pages 4115-4117; Hlatky, Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1347-1376 and Fink et al., Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1377-1390, each of which is incorporated herein by reference, including the references cited therein.
  • the compositions, complexes and/or catalysts may be contacted with an activator (described below) before or after contact with the support; alternatively, the support may be contacted with the activator prior to contact with the composition, complex or catalyst.
  • the catalysts of this invention may be combined with other catalysts in a single reactor and/or employed in a series of reactors (parallel or serial) in order to form blends of polymer products.
  • x is 2 in any of formulae (VII), (Vila), (VIIb), (VIIc), (VIId), (VIIe), (VIIf), (VIIg), (VIIh), (VIIi), (VIIj), (VIII), (Villa), (IX), (IXa), (IXb), (IXc), (IXd), (X), (Xa), and/or (XI).
  • the bis-ligand complex embodiments include two equivalents of the same phenol-heterocycle ligand or one equivalent of a first phenol- heterocycle ligand and one equivalent of a second phenol-heterocycle ligand, wherein the first and second phenol-heterocycle ligands are different from each other.
  • the first phenol-heterocycle ligand is a ligand in accord with this invention and the second phenol-heterocycle ligand is otherwise known.
  • the second phenol-heterocycle ligand can be a triazole ligand, such as those disclosed in US Patent 6,933,355, incorporated herein by reference.
  • use of a triazole ligand as the second phenol-heterocycle ligand in a bis-ligand complexes in accord with formula (VII) is characterized by the general formula:
  • a bis-ligand complex can be characterized by the general formula:
  • each R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R 1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R 5 , R 6 and R 7 on the same ring in
  • X 1 is N or C
  • X 2 is O, S, N(R 5 ) n' or CR 5
  • X 3 is O, S, N(R 6 ) n - or CR 6
  • X 4 is O, S, N(R 7 ) n »> or CR 7 , wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic
  • X 5 is N or C
  • X 6 is O, S, N(R 5 ) n - or CR 5
  • X 7 is O, S, N(R 6 ) n - or CR 6
  • X 8 is O, S, N(R 7 ) n > " or CR 7 , wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1 provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic.
  • the atoms in the X 1 , X 2 , X 3 /X 4 , N ring are different from the atoms in the X 5 , X 6 , X 7 , X 8 , N ring in the selection of the C, N, O or S atom, such that at least, either X 1 and X 5 are different or X 2 and X 6 are different or X 3 and X 7 are different or X 4 and X 8 are different.
  • X 1 and X 5 are different or X 2 and X 6 are different or X 3 and X 7 are different or X 4 and X 8 are different.
  • more than these particular X groups might be different from each other.
  • Certain embodiments include, triazoles, where combinations of X 5 , X 6 ; X 5 , X 7 ; or X 5 , X 8 are both N (meaning that the atom in the ring is N, but the R groups are as specified herein);
  • 2-benzotriazoles where X and X are both N; X , X are carbon atoms of benzo-ring fused to triazole; 1-benzotriazoles, X 5 and X 8 are both N, X 6 , X 7 are carbon atoms of benzo-ring fused to triazole); and tetrazoles, where X 5 is N, and 2 of X 6 ; X 7 ; or X 8 are N.
  • M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; m" is 0, 1, 2, or 3; and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogens (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
  • the metal-ligand complexes and compositions described herein are active catalysts typically in combination with a suitable activator, combination of activators, activating technique or activating technique, although some of the ligand-metal complexes may be active without an activator or activating technique depending on the ligand-metal complex and on the process being catalyzed.
  • the activator(s) may comprise alumoxanes, Lewis acids, Bronsted acids, compatible non-interfering activators and combinations of the foregoing.
  • Suitable ion forming compounds useful as an activator in one embodiment comprise a cation that is a Bronsted acid capable of donating a proton, and an inert, compatible, non-interfering, anion, A " .
  • Suitable anions include, but are not limited to, those containing a single coordination complex comprising a charge-bearing metal or metalloid core.
  • the anion should be sufficiently labile to be displaced by olefmic, diolefinic and unsaturated compounds or other neutral Lewis bases such as ethers or nitriles.
  • Suitable metals include, but are not limited to, aluminum, gold and platinum.
  • Suitable metalloids include, but are not limited to, boron, phosphorus, and silicon.
  • Compounds containing anions that comprise coordination complexes containing a single metal or metalloid atom are well known and many, particularly such compounds containing a single boron atom in the anion portion, are available commercially.
  • activators may be represented by the following general formula: (L*— H) d + (A d -) wherein L* is a neutral Lewis base; (L* — H) + is a Bronsted acid; A d" is a non-interfering, compatible anion having a charge of d-, and d is an integer from 1 to 3.
  • d is one, i.e., the counter ion has a single negative charge and corresponds to the formula A ' .
  • Activators comprising boron or aluminum can be represented by the following general formula:
  • L* is as previously defined; M 55 is boron or aluminum; and Q is a fluorinated C 1-20 hydrocarbyl group.
  • Q is independently selected from the group consisting of fluorinated aryl group, such as a pentafluorophenyl group (i.e., a C 6 F 5 group) or a 3,5-bis(CF 3 ) 2 C 6 H 3 group.
  • Specific (L*— H) + cations are N,N-dialkylanilinium cations, such as HNMe 2 Ph + , substituted N,N-dialkylanilinium cations, such as (4-nBu- C 6 H 4 )NH(n-C 6 H 13 ) 2 + and (4-nBu-C 6 H 4 )NH(n-C 10 H 21 ) 2 + and HNMe(C 18 H 37 ) 2 + .
  • Specific examples of anions are tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate and tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate.
  • the specific activator is PhNMe 2 H + B(C 6 F 5 ) 4 -.
  • Suitable ion forming activators comprise a salt of a cationic oxidizing agent and a non-interfering, compatible anion represented by the formula:
  • Ox e+ is a cationic oxidizing agent having a charge of e+; e is an integer from 1 to 3; and A d ⁇ , and d are as previously defined.
  • cationic oxidizing agents include: ferrocenium, hydrocarbyl-substituted ferrocenium, Ag + , or Pb +2 .
  • Specific embodiments of A d" are those anions previously defined with respect to the Bronsted acid containing activating cocatalysts, especially tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate.
  • Another suitable ion forming, activating cocatalyst comprises a compound that is a salt of a carbenium ion or silyl cation and a non-interfering, compatible anion represented by the formula: ⁇ + A- wherein: ⁇ + is a C 1-1O0 carbenium ion or silyl cation; and A- is as previously defined.
  • a preferred carbenium ion is the trityl cation, i.e. triphenylcarbenium.
  • the silyl cation may be characterized by the formula Z 4 Z 5 Z 6 Si + cation, where each of Z 4 , Z 5 , and Z 6 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxyl, aryloxyl, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, and combinations thereof.
  • a specified activator is Ph 3 C + B(C 6 F 5 ) 4 -.
  • Suitable activating cocatalysts comprise a compound that is a salt, which is represented by the formula (A* +a ) b (Z*J* j ) "C d wherein A* is a cation of charge +a; Z* is an anion group of from 1 to 50, specifically 1 to 30 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, further containing two or more Lewis base sites; J* independently each occurrence is a Lewis acid coordinated to at least one Lewis base site of Z*, and optionally two or more such J* groups may be joined together in a moiety having multiple Lewis acidic functionality; j is a number form 2 to 12; and a, b, c, and d are integers from 1 to 3, with the proviso that a x b is equal to c x d.
  • the anion portion of these activating cocatalysts may be characterized by the formula ((C 6 F 5 ) 3 M""-LN-M""(C 6 F 5 ) 3 ) " where M"" is boron or aluminum and LN is a linking group, which is specifically selected from the group consisting of cyanide, azide, dicyanamide and imidazolide.
  • the cation portion is specifically a quaternary amine. See, e.g., LaPointe, et ah, J. Am. Chan. Soc. 2000, 122, 9560-9561, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • suitable activators include Lewis acids, such as those selected from the group consisting of tris(aryl)boranes, tris(substituted aryl)boranes, tris(aryl)alanes, tris(substituted aryl)alanes, including activators such as tris(pentafluorophenyl)borane.
  • Lewis acids such as those selected from the group consisting of tris(aryl)boranes, tris(substituted aryl)boranes, tris(aryl)alanes, tris(substituted aryl)alanes, including activators such as tris(pentafluorophenyl)borane.
  • Other useful ion forming Lewis acids include those having two or more Lewis acidic sites, such as those described in WO 99/06413 or Piers, et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1999, 121, 3244-3245, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the group of Lewis acid activators is within the group of ion forming activators (although 1 exceptions to this general rule can be found) and the group tends to exclude the group 13 reagents listed below. Combinations of ion forming activators maybe used.
  • Other general activators or compounds useful in a polymerization reaction may be used. These compounds may be activators in some contexts, but may also serve other functions in the polymerization system, such as alkylating a metal center or scavenging impurities. These compounds are within the general definition of "activator,” but are not considered herein to be ion-forming activators.
  • G 13 is selected from the group consisting of B, Al, Ga, In and combinations thereof, p is 0, 1 or 2
  • each R 50 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and combinations thereof
  • each D is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydrogen, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, phosphino and combinations thereof.
  • the group 13 activator is an oligomeric or polymeric alumoxane compound, such as methylalumoxane and the known modifications thereof. See, for example, Barron, "Alkylalumoxanes, Synthesis, Structure and Reactivity", pp. 33-67 in Metallocene-Based Polyolefins: Preparation, Properties and Technology, J. Schiers and W. Kaminsky (eds.), Wiley Series in Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Chichester, England, 2000, and references cited therein.
  • a divalent metal reagent may be used that is defined by the general formula M'R 50 2-P' D P' and p' is 0 or 1 in this embodiment and R 50 and D are as defined above.
  • M' is the metal and is selected from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Zn, Cd and combinations thereof.
  • an alkali metal reagent may be used that is defined by the general formula M"'R 50 and in this embodiment R 50 is as defined above.
  • M' v is the alkali metal and is selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and combinations thereof.
  • hydrogen and/or silanes may be used in the catalytic composition or added to the polymerization system. Silanes may be characterized by the formula SiR 5 VqDq where R 50 is defined as above, q is 1, 2, 3 or 4 and D is as defined above, with the proviso that there is at least one D that is a hydrogen.
  • the molar ratio of metal: activator (whether a composition or complex is employed as a catalyst) employed specifically ranges from 1:10,000 to 100:1, more specifically from 1:5000 to 10:1, most specifically from 1:10 to 1:1.
  • mixtures of the above compounds are used, particularly a combination of a group 13 reagent and an ion-forming activator.
  • the molar ratio of group 13 reagent to ion-forming activator is specifically from 1:10,000 to 1000:1, more specifically from 1:5000 to 100:1, most specifically from 1:100 to 10:1.
  • the ion forming activators are combined with a group 13 reagent.
  • Another embodiment is a combination of the above compounds having about 1 equivalent of an optionally substituted N,N-dialkylanilinium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, and 5-30 equivalents of a group 13 reagent. In some embodiments from about 30 to 2000 equivalents of an oligomeric or polymeric alumoxane activator, such as a modified alumoxane (e.g., alkylalumoxane), can be used.
  • an oligomeric or polymeric alumoxane activator such as a modified alumoxane (e.g., alkylalumoxane)
  • the ligand or bis-ligand combination will be mixed with a suitable metal precursor compound prior to or simultaneous with allowing the mixture to be contacted to the reactants.
  • a metal-ligand complex may be formed, which may be a catalyst.
  • the ligand or ligand composition can be combined with an activated metal precursor, as described herein.
  • the catalysts of the invention may be combeined withother catalysts to make bi-modal polymer products; and here the catalysts may be combined together in solution and/or on a solid support.
  • the ligands, compositions, complexes and/or catalysts of the invention can be used to catalyze a variety of transformations, including, for example, oxidation, reduction, hydrogenation, hydrosilylation, hydrocyanation, hydroformylation, polymerization, carbonylation, isomerization, metathesis, carbon-hydrogen activation, carbon-halogen activation, cross-coupling, Friedel-Crafts acylation and alkylation, hydration, Diels-Alder reactions, Baeyer-Villiger reactions, and other transformations.
  • transformations including, for example, oxidation, reduction, hydrogenation, hydrosilylation, hydrocyanation, hydroformylation, polymerization, carbonylation, isomerization, metathesis, carbon-hydrogen activation, carbon-halogen activation, cross-coupling, Friedel-Crafts acylation and alkylation, hydration, Diels-Alder reactions, Baeyer-Villiger reactions, and other transformations.
  • compositions, complexes and/or catalysts according to the invention are particularly effective at polymerizing ethylene or ⁇ -olefins (such as propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene, 1-hexene, 1-heptene, 1-octene, 1-decene and styrene), copolymerizing ethylene with ⁇ -olefins (such as propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene, 1-hexene, 1-heptene, 1-octene, and styrene), copolymerizing ethylene with 1,1-disubstituted olefins (such as isobutylene), or copolymerizing ethylene, propylene and a diene monomer suitable for production of EPDM (Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Monomer) synthetic rubbers.
  • ⁇ -olefins such as propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene, 1-hexene, 1-hep
  • metal-ligand compositions and complexes containing zirconium or hafnium may be useful in the polymerization of propylene to form isotactic polypropylene or in the copolymerization of ethylene and one or more ⁇ -olefins, as noted above.
  • vanadium and chromium compositions and/or complexes according to the invention may be useful in, for example, the polymerization of ethylene.
  • compositions, complexes and/or catalysts according to the invention may also polymerize monomers that have polar functionalities in homopolymerizations or copolymerizations and/or homopolymerize 1,1- and 1,2-disubstituted olefins.
  • diolefins in combination with ethylene and/or ⁇ -olefins or 1,1- and 1,2-disubstituted olefins may be copolymerized.
  • catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and/or complexes of the present invention exhibit high catalytic activity in the polymerization of such ⁇ -olefins, including at high temperatures.
  • monomers useful herein may be olefinically unsaturated monomers having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms either alone or in combination.
  • monomers may include olefins (including cyclic olefins), diolefins and unsaturated monomers including ethylene and C 3 to C 20 ⁇ -olefins such as propylene, 1-butene, 1- hexene, 1-octene, 4-methyl-l-pentene, 1-norbornene, styrene and mixtures thereof; additionally, 1,1-disubstituted olefins, such as isobutylene, 2-methyl- 1-butene, 2-methyl- 1-pentene, 2-ethyl-l-pentene, 2-methyl- 1-hexene, 3-trimethylsilyl-2-methyl-l-propene, ⁇ - methyl-styrene, either alone or with other monomers such as ethylene or C 3 to C 20 ⁇
  • the ⁇ - olefins listed above may be polymerized in a stereospecific manner - for example, as in the generation of isotactic or syndiotactic or hemiisotactic polypropylene. Additionally the ⁇ -olefins may be polymerized to produce a polymer with differing tacticity sequences within the polymer chain, such as polypropylene containing atactic and isotactic sequences within the same polymer chain.
  • Diolefins generally comprise 1,3-dienes such as (butadiene), substituted 1,3-dienes (such as isoprene) and other substituted 1,3-dienes, with the term substituted referring to the same types of substituents referred to above in the definition section.
  • Diolefins also comprise 1,5-dienes and other non-conjugated dienes, such as ethylidene-norbornene, 1,4-hexadiene, dicyclopentadiene and other dienes used in the manufacture of EPDM synthetic rubbers.
  • the styrene monomers may be unsubstir ⁇ ted or substituted at one or more positions on the aryl ring.
  • the use of diolefins in this invention is typically in conjunction with another monomer that is not a diolefin.
  • acetylenically unsaturated monomers may be employed.
  • the catalysts of the present invention are active for certain monomers, particularly ethylene and/or styfene.
  • the catalysts of the present invention may provide lower comonomer incorporation in the presence of a comonomer, making these catalysts particularly useful for certain polymerization reactions where low co-monomer incorporation is desired.
  • particular catalysts of the present invention co-polymerize ethylene and styrene (or substituted styrenes), forming ethylene-styrene copolymers.
  • the catalysts of this invention are useful to polymerize a vinylidene aromatic monomer in a solution polymerization process conducted at a temperature greater than or equal to 100°C.
  • Polymers that can be prepared according to the present invention include ethylene copolymers with at least one C 3 -C 20 ⁇ -olefin, particularly propylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 4-methyl-l-pentene and 1-octene.
  • the copolymers of ethylene with at least one C 3 -C 20 ⁇ -olefin comprise from about 0.1 mol.% ⁇ -olefin to about 50 mol.% ⁇ -olefin, more specifically from about 0.2 mol.% ⁇ -olefin to about 50 mol.% ⁇ -olefin and still more specifically from about 2 mol.% ⁇ -olefm to about 30 mol.% higher olefin.
  • product copolymers may include those of ethylene and a comonomer selected from the group consisting of propylene, 1-butene, 1- hexene, and 1-octene comprise from about 0.2 to about 30 mol.% comonomer, more specifically from about 1 to about 20 mol. % comonomer.
  • ethylene copolymers with at least one C 3 -C 20 ⁇ -olefin can be produced having a high molecular weight (e.g., greater than about 50,000, more specifically greater than about 150,000) in a solution process at a temperature of greater than about 100 °C, more specifically greater than about 130 °C.
  • ethylene copolymers with at least one C 3 -C 20 ⁇ -olefin can be produced with a low molecular weight (e.g., less than about 50,000, more specifically, less than about 40,000, and even more specifically less than about 30,000).
  • the ligands, compositions, complexes, and/or catalysts of the invention may also be used to catalyze other (i.e., non-polymerization) transformations.
  • Examples of asymmetric or enantioselective reactions catalyzed by chiral Group 4 catalysts include olefin hydrogenation, olefin epoxidation, olefin isomerization, olefin-pyridine coupling, imine hydrogenation, aldol reactions, imino aldol reactions, epoxidation of allylic alcohols, alkylation of aldehydes, alkylation of imines, Diels-Alder reactions, Baeyer- Villiger reactions, hydroamination/cyclization of amino-alkenes, pinacol coupling of aldehydes, and hydrosilation of imines, ketones, and olefins.
  • the complexes and catalysts of the invention may be chiral.
  • substantially diastereomerically pure or substantially enantiomerically pure complexes may be useful for stereoselective, asymmetric, enantioselective, or diastereoselective reactions or transformations.
  • substantially enantiomerically- or diastereomerically-pure complexes, ligand-metal compositions, and catalysts according to the invention may be used as asymmetric catalysts for a range of reactions, including polymerization reactions and other (non-polymerization) reactions, including many reactions useful in organic synthesis
  • catalysts incorporating the compositions and complexes of the invention may be used to catalyze the asymmetric production of reaction products with enantiomeric excess (ee) or diastereomeric excess (de) of greater than 90% or greater than 99%.
  • ee enantiomeric excess
  • de diastereomeric excess
  • Single enantiomers of a chiral product can be prepared by a variety of techniques, including the resolution of racemates, or the use of substantially enantiomerically pure starting materials from the chiral pool of natural products, but for large scale synthesis the use of enantioselective catalysis is often the most attractive, and most economical, choice. See, e.g., Blaser et ah, "Enantioselective Synthesis", pp. 1131-1149, in Applied Homogeneous Catalysis with Organometallic Compounds, Vol. 3, Cornils, B., & Herrmann, W.
  • novel products such as polymers, copolymers or interpolymers, may be formed having unique physical and/or melt flow properties.
  • Such novel polymers can be employed alone or with other polymers in a blend to form products that may be molded, cast, extruded or spun.
  • End uses for the polymers made with the catalysts of this invention include films for packaging, trash bags, bottles, containers, foams, coatings, insulating devices and household items.
  • functionalized polymers are useful as solid supports for organometallic or chemical synthesis processes.
  • the ⁇ -olefms listed above may be polymerized in a stereoselective manner to produce a substantially stereoregular polymer product (that is, a polymer product that is detectably enriched in m or r dyads (as determined, e.g., by 13 C NMR) as compared to a corresponding atactic material), as in the generation of isotactic, syndiotactic or hem ⁇ sotactic poly- ⁇ -olefins.
  • a substantially stereoregular polymer product that is, a polymer product that is detectably enriched in m or r dyads (as determined, e.g., by 13 C NMR) as compared to a corresponding atactic material
  • isotactic, syndiotactic or hem ⁇ sotactic poly- ⁇ -olefins for example, in some embodiments 1- butene may be polymerized into isotactic poly-1-
  • the ⁇ -olefins may be polymerized to produce a polymer with differing tacticity sequences within the polymer chain, such as polypropylene containing atactic and isotactic sequences within the same polymer chain.
  • the stereoregularity may be interrupted by stereoerrors, in particular isolated stereoerrors, which is an indication of enantiomorphic side control.
  • the isotactic polypropylene may include regioerrors as described in the literature (see, e.g., Resconi et al., Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1253-1345).
  • isotactic polypropylene can be produced having a narrow polydispersity (e.g., less than about 3.0 and more specifically less than 2.5) combined with a high molecular weight (e.g., greater than about 50,000, more specifically greater than about 100,000, even more specifically greater than about 150,000, and even more specifically greater than about 500,000) in a solution polymerization process at a temperature of greater than about 100°C.
  • narrow polydispersity e.g., less than about 3.0 and more specifically less than 2.5
  • a high molecular weight e.g., greater than about 50,000, more specifically greater than about 100,000, even more specifically greater than about 150,000, and even more specifically greater than about 500,000
  • isotactic polypropylene can be produced with a low molecular weight (e.g., less than about 30,000, more specifically less than about 15,000, and even more specifically less than about 5,000).
  • broader polydispersities can be obtained for the isotactic polypropylene or other polymers (e.g., copolymers of ethylene and ⁇ -olefins as discussed in more detail below) produced according to the invention.
  • the polymerization conditions are described herein, producing isotactic polypropylene with a crystallinity index of between about 0.35 and about 0.95, more specifically between about 0.65 and 0.95.
  • the crystallinity index is determined using FTIR as is known to those of skill in the art and calibrated based on a relative scale.
  • the crystallinity index value can be determined using commercially available FTIR equipment (such as a Bruker Equinox 55 with an IR Scope II in reflection mode using Pike MappIR software).
  • the crystallinity index is obtained from the ratio of band heights at 995 cm "1 and 972 cm '1 .
  • Atactic polypropylene has a ratio of band heights or crystallinity index of 0.2.' Greater than 98% isotactic polypropylene has a crystallinity index ratio of greater than 0.95. Generally, the amount of error in crystallinity index measurements is ⁇ 0.05.
  • Polymer blends of various compositions show a linear relationship between % isotacticity and crystallinity index. See, for example, J. P. Luongo, J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 1960, 3, 302-309 and T. Sundell, et al, Polymer 1996, 37, 3227-3231, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • isotacticity can also be represented by percent pentads (%mmmm) as determined by 13 C NMR spectroscopy.
  • Proton decoupled 13 C NMR spectroscopy can be performed using commercially available equipment (such as a Bruker 300 MHz at 100°C probe temperature) to determine the degree of tacticity as %mmmm pentads (for assignment of 13 C signals see the review H.H. Brintzinger et al., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Eng. 1995, 34, 1143, which is incorporated herein by reference; and Resconi, Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1253-1345 and Gibson et al., Chem Rev.
  • a 15-30 mg polymer sample is dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of C 2 D 2 Cl 4 and C 2 Cl 4 by heating the sample to ca. 100°C.
  • the %mmmm is determined by the ratio of peak integral from 23.5 to 21.5 ppm and peak integral 23.5 to 19 ppm (in the absence of significant chain end regio- irregularity signals in this region).
  • Proton decoupled C NMR spectroscopy can be also performed to determine the frequency of and nature of stereoerrors and regioerrors.
  • the melting point of the crystalline polypropylene is generally in the range of from about 115°C to about 165°C, more specifically between about 120°C and 155°C, and in some embodiments specifically above about 15O°C. Melting points are determined by differential scanning calorimetry, as is known in the art (see also the example section, herein).
  • the total styrene content of the polymer products includes both the styrene incorporated in the ethylene-styrene copolymer and any background homopolystyrene (PS) in the product sample.
  • Tacticity determination for polystyrene samples are determined using C NMR. High temperature NMR spectra are recorded on a Bruker 300 MHz spectrometer. 13 C chemical shifts (75.47 MHz) are referenced relative to tetrachloro-ethane-d2 solvent peaks. Polymer sample concentrations are 100-200 mg/ml.
  • Tacticity of styrene polymers is determined using the 144-147 ppm region of the 13 C NMR spectrum (phenyl C(I)), see NMR and Macromolecules, Randall Ed., Harwood et g[. Ch. 13: Polystyrene and Epimerized Isotactic Polystyrenes (1983). [00270] The ratio of 1-octene to ethylene incorporated in the ethylene-octene copolymer products was determined by FTIR.
  • FTIR FTIR was performed on a Bruker Equinox 55 +IR Scope II in reflection mode using a Pike MappIR accessory with 16 scans.
  • the ratio of 1-octene to ethylene incorporation was represented as the weight % (wt. %) of 1- octene incorporated in the polymer (wt. % 1-octene).
  • Wt. % 1-octene was obtained from ratio of band heights at 1378 cm -1 and 4335 cm -1 . This method was calibrated using a set of ethylene/1 -octene copolymers with a range of known wt. % 1-octene content.
  • Novel polymers, copolymers or interpolymers may be formed having unique physical and/or melt flow properties.
  • Polymers that can be prepared according to the present invention include copolymers of ethylene and one or more ⁇ -olefins, such as copolymers of ethylene with at least one C 4 -C 20 ⁇ -olefm, such as 1-butene, 1-hexene, 4- methyl-1-pentene, 1-octene or styrene.
  • the techniques described herein can be used to prepare propylene copolymers with at least one C 4 -C 20 ⁇ -olef ⁇ n.
  • the copolymers of ethylene or propylene with at least one C 4 -C 20 ⁇ -olefm comprise from about 0.01 mol.% higher olefin to about 50 mol.% higher olefin, more specifically from about 0.1 mol.% higher olefin to about 50 mol.% higher olefin and still more specifically from about 1 mol.% higher olefin to about 30 mol.% higher olefin.
  • crystalline copolymers include those of ethylene or propylene and a comonomer selected from the group consisting of ethylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 1-octene and styrene comprise from about 0.1 to about 50 mol.% comonomer, more specifically from about 1 to about 20 mol. % comonomer, even more specifically from about 2 to about 15 mol. % comonomer and most specifically from about 5 to about 12 mol. % comonomer.
  • novel polymers disclosed herein can be employed alone or with other natural or synthetic polymers in a blend.
  • Such other natural or synthetic polymers can be polyethylene (including linear low density polyethylene, low density polyethylene, high density polyethylene, etc.), atactic polypropylene, nylon, EPDM, ethylene-propylene elastomer copolymers, polystyrene (including syndiotactic polystyrene), ethylene-styrene copolymers and terpolymers of ethylene-styrene and other C 3 -C 20 olefins (such as propylene).
  • Polymerization is carried out under polymerization conditions, including temperatures of from -100°C to 300°C and pressures from atmospheric to 3000 atmospheres.
  • Suspension, solution, slurry, gas phase or high-pressure polymerization processes may be employed with the catalysts and compounds of this invention. Such processes can be run in a batch, semi-batch or continuous mode. Examples of such processes are well known in the art.
  • a support for the catalyst may be employed, which may be inorganic (such as alumina, magnesium chloride or silica) or organic (such as a polymer or cross-linked polymer). Methods for the preparation of supported catalysts are known in the art. Slurry, suspension, gas phase and high-pressure processes as known to those skilled in the art may also be used with supported catalysts of the invention.
  • additives that are useful in a polymerization reaction may be employed, such as scavengers, promoters, modifiers and/or chain transfer agents, such as hydrogen, aluminum alkyls and/or silanes.
  • catalytic performance can be determined a number of different ways, as those of skill in the art will appreciate. Catalytic performance can be determined by the yield of polymer obtained per mole of metal complex, which in some contexts may be considered to be activity. The examples provide data for these comparisons.
  • a solution process is specified for certain benefits, with the solution process being run at a temperature above 90°C, more specifically at a temperature above 100°C, further more specifically at a temperature above HO°C and even further more specifically at a temperature above 13O°C.
  • Suitable solvents for polymerization are non-coordinating, inert liquids.
  • Examples include straight and branched-chain hydrocarbons such as isobutane, butane, pentane, isopentane, hexane, isohexane, heptane, octane, Isopar-E® and mixtures thereof; cyclic and alicyclic hydrocarbons such as cyclohexane, cycloheptane, methylcyclohexane, methylcycloheptane, and mixtures thereof; perhalogenated hydrocarbons such as perfluorinated C 4-10 alkanes, chlorobenzene, and aromatic and alkyl substituted aromatic compounds such as benzene, toluene, mesitylene, and xylene.
  • straight and branched-chain hydrocarbons such as isobutane, butane, pentane, isopentane, hexane, isohexane, heptane, octane, Isopar-E
  • Suitable solvents also include liquid olefins which may act as monomers or comonomers including ethylene, propylene, 1-butene, butadiene, cyclopentene, 1-hexene, 1-pentene, 3 -methyl- 1-pentene, 4-methyl-l-pentene, 1,4-hexadiene, 1-octene, 1-decene, isobutylene, styrene, divinylbenzene, allylbenzene, and vinyltoluene (including all isomers alone or in admixture). Mixtures of the foregoing are also suitable.
  • a solution process is specified for crystalline polypropylene production.
  • the solution process to prepare isotactic polypropylene comprises adding a catalyst and propylene monomer to a reactor and subjecting the contents to polymerization conditions.
  • the ligands, metal-ligand complexes and compositions of this invention can be prepared and tested for catalytic activity in one or more of the above reactions in a combinatorial fashion.
  • Combinatorial chemistry generally involves the parallel or rapid serial synthesis and/or screening or characterization of compounds and compositions of matter.
  • U.S. Patent Nos. 5,985,356, 6,030,917 and WO 98/03521, all of which are incorporated herein by reference, generally disclose combinatorial methods.
  • the ligands, metal-ligand complexes or compositions may be prepared and/or tested in rapid serial and/or parallel fashion, e.g., in an array format.
  • ligands, metal-ligand complexes or compositions may take the form of an array comprising a plurality of compounds wherein each compound can be characterized by any of the above general formulas ⁇ i.e., I, II, III, etc.).
  • An array of ligands may be synthesized using the procedures outlined previously.
  • the array may also be of metal precursor compounds, the metal-ligand complexes or compositions characterized by the previously described formulae and/or description.
  • each member of the array will have differences so that, for example, a ligand or activator or metal precursor or R group in a first region of the array may be different than the ligand or activator or metal precursor or R group in a second region of the array. Other variables may also differ from region to region in the array.
  • each of the plurality of compositions or complexes has a different composition or stoichiometry, and typically each composition or complex is at a selected region on a substrate such that each compound is isolated from the other compositions or complexes.
  • This isolation can take many forms, typically depending on the substrate used. If a flat substrate is used, there may simply be sufficient space between regions so that there cannot be interdiffusion between compositions or complexes.
  • the substrate can be a microtiter or similar plate having wells so that each composition or complex is in a region separated from other compounds in other regions by a physical barrier.
  • the array may also comprise a parallel reactor or testing chamber.
  • the array typically comprises at least 8 compounds, complexes or compositions each having a different chemical formula, meaning that there must be at least one different atom or bond differentiating the members in the array or different ratios of the components referred to herein (with components referring to ligands, metal precursors, activators, group 13 reagents, solvents, monomers, supports, etc.).
  • Building Block Table C27, D1-D3, E2-E24, F1-F12, and G1-G4, are listed in the Building Block Table.
  • Building block BBl was purchased from Lancaster.
  • Building blocks BB5 and BB7 were purchased from Aldrich. All other building blocks listed in Building Block Table were prepared by Syngene.
  • Aryloximes and arylhyroximidoyl chlorides used for the synthesis of ligands A1-A35 were either available commercially or prepared using techniques known to those of skill in the art (see Liu, et al, J. Org. Chem. 1980, 45, 3916-3918). All boronic acids used were commercially available with the exception of 9- anthracenylboronic acid that was prepared as described in Scheme Dl.
  • 2,4- Dibromothiazole was purchased from Frontier Scientific. All benzils used for the synthesis of ligands E2-E16 were available commercially. Phenol protecting groups, methoxymethyl ether and methyl ether, were introduced using standard procedures known to those of skill in the art.
  • a reaction flask was charged, under N 2 , with BBlO (46 mg, 0.20 mmol), benzaldehyde oxime (0.066 rnL, 0.60 mmol), cyclohexane (4.0 mL), 2,6-lutidine (0.07 mL, 0.60 mmol), and N-chlorosuccinimide (80 mg, 0.60 mmol).
  • the reaction was heated at 8O°C for 18h.
  • Ligand A22 was synthesized using a slightly modified procedure to that described above for ligand Al. A mixture of the oxime (0.90 mmol), cyclohexane (3.0 mL), and iV-chlorosuccinimide (0.90 mmol) was first heated to 8O°C for Ih. After cooling to rt, a solution of BBIl (0.30 mmol) and 2,6-lutidine (0.90 mmol) in cyclohexane (3.0 mL) was added. The reaction was heated back to 8O°C for 18h. Ligand A22 was isolated in 58% yield.
  • Ligand A35 was synthesized as described for ligand Al except an aqueous workup was done prior to chromatography. Cyclohexane was removed by rotary evaporation and the crude reaction mixture was taken up in Et 2 O. The Et 2 O solution was washed twice with H 2 O, once with brine, and then dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Ligand A35 was isolated in 79% yield.
  • Ligands A3-A9 were synthesized as described above for ligand A2 in yields ranging from 49-84%.
  • Ligands A20, and A30-A32 were synthesized as described above for ligand A13. Ligand A20 was isolated in 91% yield, ligand A30 in 87% yield, ligand
  • Ligands AlO and All were synthesized as described for ligand A13 except the reaction temperature was 6O°C instead of 8O°C. Ligand AlO was isolated in
  • Ligands A33 and A34 were synthesized as described for ligand A13 except an aqueous workup was done prior to chromatography. Cyclohexane was removed by rotary evaporation and the crude reaction mixture was taken up in CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • Ligand A33 was isolated in 44% yield and ligand A34 in 62%yield.
  • Ligands B2 and B3 were synthesized as described above for ligand Bl in yields of 46% and 52%, respectively.
  • Ligands B4-B6 were synthesized as described for Bl except 5.0 eq of nitrile was used instead of 10.0 eq. Ligand B4 was isolated in 32% yield, ligand B5 in 42% yield, and ligand B6 in 57% yield.
  • n-BuLi (4.1 mL, 6.60 mmol, 1.6M in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of MOM-protected BB2 (1.92g, 5.5 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at -78°C under N 2 . After 30 min. at -78°C, triisopropylborate (1.65 mL, 7.15 mmol) was added and the reaction was warmed to rt. After Ih at rt, the reaction was quenched with MeOH (2 mL) then concentrated by rotary evaporation.
  • Ligands C25 and C27 were synthesized as described above for C24 in yields of 79% and 59%, respectively.
  • n-BuLi (2.4 niL, 3.84 mmol, 1.6M in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of methyl-protected BBl (1.Og, 3.34 mmol) in Et 2 O (10 mL) at -78°C under N 2 . After 30 min. at -78°C, triisopropylborate (0.88 mL, 3.84 mmol) was added and the reaction was warmed to rt. After Ih at rt, the reaction was quenched with MeOH (2 mL) then concentrated by rotary evaporation.
  • reaction flask was then charged, under N 2 , with 2,4-dibromothiazole (486 mg, 2.0 mmol), Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 (116 mg, 5 mol%), Na 2 CO 3 (1.1 mL, 2.0M solution in H 2 O), and toluene (10 mL).
  • the reaction was heated overnight at 9O°C. After cooling to rt, H 2 O was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted several times with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic layers were washed with H 2 O, brine, and then dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • the crude reaction mixture was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (5.0 mL) and BBr 3 (3.0 mL, 1.0M in CH 2 Cl 2 ) was added dropwise at rt. After Ih, the reaction was quenched with several drops of MeOH, washed with H 2 O, sat. NH 4 Cl (aq.), brine, and then dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with 1-2% Et 2 O in hexanes. Isolated 715 mg, 97% yield, of ligand C26 as a white solid.
  • Ligand C15 was synthesized, in 81% yield, as described for C2 except toluene was used as solvent and the reaction was run at 9O°C.
  • Ligand C16 was synthesized as described for C2 except the phenol was protected as the methyl ether instead of the methoxy methyl ether. Ligand C16 was obtained after deprotection with BBr 3 as described for C26. Ligand C16 was isolated in 32% yield.
  • n-BuLi (0.44 mL, 0.7 mmol, 1.6 M solution in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of MOM-protected BB2 (210 mg, 0.6 mmol) in Et 2 O (2.0 mL) at - 2O°C under N 2 .
  • triisopropylborate (0.17 mL, 0.72 mmol) was added and the reaction was warmed to rt and stirred for Ih. The reaction was quenched with MeOH (1.0 mL) then concentrated by rotary evaporation.
  • Ligands D2 and D3 were synthesized as described above in yields of 52% and 11%, respectively.
  • Ligands E2-E9 and E11-E16 were prepared as described above for ligand
  • Ligands El 7 and E19-E24 were synthesized as described above for ligand E18 in yields ranging from 61-91% with the exception of ligand E21 which was isolated in 31% yield.
  • Ligand Fl was synthesized as described above for ligand F7 with the exception that K 2 CO 3 was used instead Of Cs 2 CO 3 . Ligand Fl was isolated in 65% yield.
  • Fl was prepared by reacting BB7 with iV-methyl-l,2-phenylenediamine using techniques known to those of skill in the art.
  • Ligand F12 was synthesized in 62% yield as described above for ligand
  • Ligands Gl and G3 were synthesized as described above in isolated yields of 9% and 14%, respectively.
  • AU air sensitive procedures were performed under a purified argon or nitrogen atmosphere in a Vacuum Atmospheres or MBraun glove box.
  • AU solvents used were anhydrous, de-oxygenated and purified according to known techniques. All ligands and metal precursors were prepared according to procedures known to those of skill in the art, e.g., under inert atmosphere conditions, etc.
  • Group 13 reageants were purchased from Strem Chemicals Inc.
  • Activators were purchased from Boulder Scientific Company (Mead, CO) or prepared according to procedures known to those of skill in the art.
  • the vials contain parylene coated stir-bars and were weighed prior to their use in screening (described below). Solutions of a parent array of desired ligands were transferred to arrays of glass vials (0.3 - 0.6 ⁇ mol of each ligand) and the solvent was then removed from the ligand array using a nitrogen or argon stream. The resultant ligand array was contacted with a suitable group IV precursor, a group 13 reagent, 100 ⁇ l of 1-octene and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution). A Teflon sheet and rubber gasket were then placed over the top of the array and an aluminum cover was screwed on the top to seal the array (reactor A). Specific details are described below. The aluminum block reactor (reactor A) has been described in U.S. Patent No. 6,507,645, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 - 20 mmol/1: Ti(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Zr(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Hf(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Ti(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Zr(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Hf(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; TiC1 2 (N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 2 . [00345] Solutions of group 13 reagents were prepared in toluene typically at 50 -
  • Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL.
  • Method 1 75°C Complexation, Reactor A, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 ⁇ mol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (15-30 ⁇ L per well, 0.3 ⁇ mol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75 °C. The array was then treated with a stock solution- of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), followed by 100 ⁇ l of 1- octene, and finally an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 ⁇ L per well). Immediately a Teflon sheet and rubber gasket were then placed over the top of the array and an aluminum cover was screwed on the top to seal the array (reactor A) and the array was stirred at 75°C for 1 hour.
  • toluene ca. 100 ⁇ L per well
  • Section 2Ci Ethylene-Styrene Copolymerization Examples in a 96-well
  • Ethylene-styrene copolymerization reactions were performed in a 96-well format using 8 mm x 30 mm tarred glass vials arranged in an 8 x 12 array within an aluminum block.
  • Reagents were added from stock solutions or slurries to the 8 mm x 30 mm vials using a Cavro liquid handling robot driven by library design and/or automation software, such as Library Studio® and Impressionist® software, available from Symyx Technologies, Inc., of Santa Clara, California, which is described in European Patent No. 1080435, U.S. Patent No. 6,507,645, and European Patent No. 1175645.
  • the vials contain parylene coated stir-bars and were weighed prior to their use in screening (described below). Solutions of a parent array of desired ligands were transferred to arrays of glass vials (0.3 - 0.6 ⁇ mol of each ligand) and the solvent was then removed from the ligand array using a nitrogen or argon stream. The resultant ligand array was contacted with a suitable group IV precursor, a group 13 reagent and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution), followed by 20 ⁇ l of styrene. The array was sealed with a reactor top capable of delivering gaseous reagent(s) (reactor B) and pressurized with ethylene. Specific details are described below. The HiP reactor (reactor B) is described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2003- 0161763, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 - 20 mmol/1: Ti(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Zr(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Hf(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Ti(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Zr(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ;
  • Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL.
  • Method 1 75°C Complexation, Reactor B, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 ⁇ mol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene ⁇ pa. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 ⁇ L per well, 0.3 ⁇ mol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75°C. The array was then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ⁇ 5 min).
  • the array of vials was then transferred to a fume hood, and to each vial was quenched by 500 ⁇ L of acidified methanol.
  • a Teflon sheet and rubber gasket are then placed over the top of the array and an aluminum cover was screwed on the top to seal the array.
  • the array was . first mechanically agitated for approximately an hour and then centrifuged at 1500 rpm for 10 minutes.
  • the acidified methanol solution was decanted off. This process was repeated twice more with acidified methanol, followed by three washing rounds using methylethylketone (MEK) to remove soluble polystyrene.
  • MEK methylethylketone
  • TCB 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
  • Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 mmol/1: Ti(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Zr(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Hf(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Ti(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Zr(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Hf(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; TiCl 2 (N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 2 .
  • Method 1 75°C Complexation, Reactor B, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 ⁇ mol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 ⁇ L per well, 0.3 ⁇ mol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75°C. The array was then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ⁇ 5 min). The array was sealed using a reactor top capable of delivering gaseous reagent(s) (reactor B) and stirred at 75°C under 80 psi of propylene for 1 hour.
  • toluene ca. 100 ⁇ L per well
  • toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 ⁇
  • Method 2 75°C Complexation, Reactor C, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 ⁇ mol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 ⁇ L per well, 0.3 ⁇ mol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75°C. The array was then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca.
  • the array of vials was then transferred to a fume hood, and to each vial was quenched by added 100 - 300 uL of methanol. The volatiles were removed by using a nitrogen stream, followed by drying the array over-night in vacuo. The vials were weighed in order to determine the yield of polymer produced. 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene (TCB) was added vials which met a minimum yield criteria, and the resulting TCB solutions were heated for 2 hours at 140°C. An aliquot of the hot solution was deposited on a wafer, in order to form a thin film. The resultant polymer thin-films were analyzed via a rapid-FT-IR method (details in the secondary screening section) to determine tacticity. Table 2C presents the results from the propylene homopolymerization reactions performed in a 96-well format.
  • the system was operated at an eluent flow rate of 1.5 mL/min and an oven temperature of 160°C; o- dichlorobenzene was used as the eluent; the polymer samples were dissolved 1,2,4- trichlorobenzene at a concentration of about 5 mg/mL; 200 ⁇ L of a polymer solution were injected into the system; and the concentration of the polymer in the eluent was monitored using an evaporative light scattering detector. All of the molecular weight results obtained are relative to linear polystyrene standards.
  • DSC Differential Scanning Calorimetry
  • Section 3A Propylene Polymerizations using metal-ligand compositions: A total of 23 separate polymerization reactions were performed as follows.
  • Method A A pre-weighed glass vial insert and disposable stirring paddle were fitted to each reaction vessel of the reactor. The reactor was then closed, 0.200 mL of a 0.05 M solution of Modified Methylaluminoxane 3A (from Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, II) ("MMAO") in toluene and 3.8 mL of toluene were injected into each pressure reaction vessel through a valve. The temperature was then set to the appropriate setting (with specific temperatures for each polymerization being listed in Table 3A and Table 3B, below), and the stirring speed was set to 800 rpm unless otherwise noted. The mixture was exposed to propylene at 100 psi pressure. A propylene pressure of 100 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment.
  • MMAO Modified Methylaluminoxane 3A
  • Section 3 AU In situ preparation of metal-ligand compositions
  • Method ZA 24 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in 1,2-dichloroethane) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the 1 mL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (50 ⁇ L) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 35 min.
  • Method ZB Similar to Method ZA except that 60 ⁇ l of the ligand solution (10 mM in 1,2-dichloroethane) was dispensed in the 1 mL glass vial.
  • Method ZC 48 ⁇ l of the ligand solution (25 mM in 1,2-dichloroethane) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the 1 mL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (50 ⁇ L) followed by the addition of 0.5 mol equivalents of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 35 min.
  • Method ZD Similar to Method ZC except that 120 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (10 mM in 1,2- dichloroethane) was dispensed in the ImL glass vial.
  • Method ZE Similar to Method ZC except that 60 ⁇ L of toluene (instead of 50 ⁇ L) was added to the ImL glass vial containing the ligand prior to the addition of the metal precursor and the reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature prior to screening.
  • Method ZF 40 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a ImL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent.
  • Method ZH 48 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a ImL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (60 ⁇ L) followed by the addition of 0.5 mol equivalents of the metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 45 min.
  • Method ZI Similar to Method ZH except that 40 ⁇ L (instead of 50 ⁇ L) of toluene was added to the 1 mL glass vial prior to the addition of the metal precursor and the reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature prior to screening.
  • Method ZJ 24 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in 1,2-dicliloroethane) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (40 ⁇ L) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal- ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 45 min.
  • Method ZK Similar to Method ZJ except that 24 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in the 1 mL glass vial.
  • Method ZL Similar to ZH except that 96 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in the 1 mL glass vial.
  • Method ZM Similar to Method ZJ except that 48 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in the ImL glass vial.
  • Method ZN 40 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent.
  • Method ZO Similar to method ZN except that 100 ⁇ L of the ligand solution ( 10 mM in toluene) was dispensed into the ImL glass vial.
  • Method ZP Similar to Method ZN except that 60 ⁇ L (instead of 100 ⁇ L) of toluene was added to the 1 mL glass vial prior to the addition of metal precursor.
  • Method ZQ 20 ⁇ L of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the 1 mL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (40 ⁇ L ) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of the metal precursor (5 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 70 °C for 1 h.
  • Method ZR Similar to Method ZQ except that a 25 mM ligand solution in 1,2-dichloroethane was used.
  • Section 3Aiii Preparation of the group 13 reagent and activator stock solutions.
  • the "activator solution” is a solution of N,N'-dimethylanilinium tetrakis
  • ABS 20 penentafluorophenyl borate
  • ABS 20 N,N'-dimethylanilinium tetrakis
  • BF 15 tris(pentafluorophenyl)borane
  • ABSC tris(pentafluorophenyl)borane
  • the “group 13 reagent” solution is either a solution of trimethylaluminum (“TMA”), triisobutylaluminium (“TIBA”) or a solution of nonhydrolytic polymethylaluminoxane (Akzo Nobel PMAO-IP, referred to below as "PMAO", available from Akzo Nobel Polymer Chemicals, Chicago, Illinois, USA), all “group 13 reagent” solutions were in toluene.
  • TMA trimethylaluminum
  • TIBA triisobutylaluminium
  • PMAO nonhydrolytic polymethylaluminoxane
  • Method AAAA To the 1 mL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 mM solution, containing the indicated equivalents of group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added. After about 11 minutes, 1.1 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator solution (2.5 mM) was added to the 15 mL vial and the reaction mixture was mixed.
  • Method BBBB To the 1 mL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 niM solution, containing the indicated equivalents group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added.
  • Method CCCC Similar to Method AAAA except that the activator solution was a toluene solution of the mixture of ABF 20 and BF 15 (2.5mM ABF 20 /5mM BF 15 ) and a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) was used.
  • Method DDDD Similar to method AAAA except that 200 mM of group 13 reagent solution and 5 mM activator solution were used (instead of 50 mM and 2.5 mM respectively) and the total volume injected was 1.0 mL (instead of 0.8 mL).
  • Method EEEE Similar to Method DDDD except that a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator (5 mM ABF 20 /10 mM BF 15 ) was used.
  • Method FFFF Similar to method BBBB except that a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator (2.5 mM ABF 20 /5.0 mM BF 15 ) was used and 400 ⁇ L of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator.
  • Method GGGG Similar to method AAAA except that a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator solution (2.5mM ABF 20 /5.0mM BF 15 ) was used and the total volume injected to the reaction vessel was 0.5 mL (instead of 0.8 mL).
  • Method HHHH To the 1 mL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 mM solution, containing the indicated equivalents group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added.
  • Method JJJJ Similar to Method HHHH except that 200 mM of group 13 reagent solution and 5mM ABF 20 /10mM BF 15 were used and the total volume injected to the pre-pressurized reaction vessel was 0.8 niL.
  • Method KKKK To the 1 niL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 mM solution, containing the indicated equivalents of group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added followed by an immediate addition of 300 ⁇ L of toluene.
  • Method MMMM Similar to Method AAAA except that the total volume injected to the pre-pressurized reaction vessel was 0.5 mL.
  • Method NNNN Similar to method AAAA except that the total volume injected was 1.0 mL (instead of 0.8 mL).
  • the polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-1800 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control.
  • the specific polymerization times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3A.
  • the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor.
  • the polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction.
  • the glass vial insert containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box.
  • the volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After most of the volatile components had evaporated, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product.
  • the polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above, to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and by FTIR spectroscopy to determine the crystallinity index. The melting point of selected samples was measured by DSC, as described above.
  • the polymerization reactor was prepared in the manner described in
  • Section 3BH Preparation of the group 13 reagent and activator stock solutions
  • the "activator solution” is either a solution of N,N'-dimethylanilinium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ("ABF 2 o") in toluene or .a solution of trityl tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ("TBF 20 ”) in toluene.
  • the "ABF 20 " solution is heated to approximately 85°C to dissolve the reagent.
  • the "TBF 20 " solution is at ambient temperature.
  • the molarity is indicated in the "activation method" of the individual example described below.
  • the "group 13 reagent solution” is either a solution of trimethylaluminium ("TMA”) or a solution of tri-isobutyl aluminium (“TIBA”).
  • TMA trimethylaluminium
  • TIBA tri-isobutyl aluminium
  • Section 3Biii Activation method and injection of solutions into the pressure reactor vessel
  • Method AA 40 ⁇ L of a 5OmM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 80 ⁇ L of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.4 ⁇ mol metal complex was added. After about 12 min, 176 ⁇ L of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 niM) was added to the 1 niL vial and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed.
  • the polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-1800 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control.
  • the specific polymerization times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3B.
  • the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor.
  • the polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction.
  • the glass vial insert containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box.
  • the volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After most of the volatile components had evaporated, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product.
  • the polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above, to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and by FTIR spectroscopy to determine the crystallinity index.
  • Method B A pre- weighed glass vial insert and disposable stirring paddle were fitted to each reaction vessel of the reactor. The reactor was then closed, 0.200 niL of a 0.05 M solution of Modified Methylaluminoxane 3A (from Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, II) ("MMAO") in toluene, 0.400 mL of octene and 4.4 niL of toluene were injected into each pressure reaction vessel through a valve. The temperature was then set to the appropriate setting (with specific temperatures for each polymerization being listed in Table 3 C and Table 3D, below), and the stirring speed was set to 800 rpm unless otherwise noted. The mixture was exposed to ethylene at 100 psi pressure. An ethylene pressure of 100 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment. [00404] Method C: Method C is similar to method B except that 0.200 mL of a
  • Section 3Ciii Activation methods and injection of solutions into the pressure reactor vessel
  • the glass vial insert containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box.
  • the volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After substantial evaporation of the volatile components, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product.
  • the polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and FTIR spectroscopy to determine the comonomer incorporation. Results are presented in Table 3C.
  • the reactor was prepared as described in Methods B and C, above. In some examples hydrogen (as a mixture with nitrogen) was added; the amount added is noted in Table 3D. An ethylene pressure of 100 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment.
  • the "activator solution” is either a 2.5 mM solution of N,N'- dimethylanilinium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate (“ABF 20 ”) in toluene or a 400 mM solution of Modified Methylaluminoxane - 3A (Azko) ("MMAO") in toluene.
  • the "ABF 20 " solution is heated to approximately 85°C to dissolve the reagent.
  • the "MMAO” solution is at ambient temperature.
  • the group 13 reagent solution is either a solution of triisobutylaluminium or modified methalumoxane-3 A (“MMAO”) in toluene.
  • the molarity of the group 13 reagent is noted below and the molar equivalents is noted in Table 3D.
  • Method AAA 75 ⁇ L of a 20 mM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 niL vial. 60 ⁇ L of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.3 ⁇ mol metal complex was added. After about 45 seconds, 132 ⁇ L of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 mM) was added to the 1 mL vial followed by an immediate addition of 700 ⁇ L of toluene and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed.
  • Method BBB Similar to Method AAA, except that 340 ⁇ L of toluene (instead of 700 ⁇ L) was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator.
  • Method CCC Similar to Method BBB, except that 150 ⁇ L of a 400 mM activator solution was used.
  • Method DDD Similar to Method CCC, except that 150 ⁇ L of a 400 mM group 13 reagent solution was added to the ImL vial prior to the addition of the metal complex and 700 ⁇ L (instead of 340 ⁇ L) of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator.
  • Method EEE Similar to Method DDD except that 340 ⁇ L of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator.
  • Method FFF Similar to Method AAA, except that 340 ⁇ L (instead of 700 ⁇ L) of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator.
  • Method GGG Similar to Method CCC except that 700 ⁇ L (instead of 340 ⁇ L) of toluene was added immediately after the activator.
  • Method HHH 50 ⁇ L of a 20 mM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 50 ⁇ L of complex solution (4 mM in toluene) containing 0.2 ⁇ mol metal complex was added. After about 12 min, 88 ⁇ L of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 mM) was added to the 1 mL vial immediately followed by the addition of 800 ⁇ L of toluene and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed.
  • Method MMM Similar to Method LLL except that 150 ⁇ L of toluene was added after complex.
  • Method NNN 40 ⁇ L of a 5OmM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 80 ⁇ L of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.4 ⁇ mol metal complex was added.
  • the polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-600 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control.
  • the specific times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3D.
  • the polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction.
  • the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor.
  • the glass vial insert containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box.
  • the volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After substantial evaporation of the volatile components, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product.
  • the polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and FTIR spectroscopy to determine the comonomer incorporation. Results are presented in Table 3D.
  • Section 3E Styrene polymerizations in 12-well format
  • Section 3Ei Stock Solutions: Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 - 20 mmol/1: Ti(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Zr(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Hf(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 4 ; Ti(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Zr(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; Hf(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 4 ; TiCl 2 (N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 2 ; [Ti(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 3 + ][C 6 H 5 CH 2 B(C 6 Fs) 3 -]; [Zr(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 3 + ][C 6 HsCH 2 B(C 6 F 5 ) 3 -] and [Hf(CH 2 C 6 H 5 ) 3 + ][C 6 H 5 CH 2 B(C 6 Fs) 3 " ] were generated in situ within the 12 well arrays by
  • Solutions of group 13 reagents were prepared in toluene typically at 50 - 250 mmol/1: Al(Me) 3 , (TMA); Al(Et) 3 , (TEA); Al( i Bu) 3 ,(TIBA); PMAO-IP & MMAO-3A.
  • Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL.
  • Section 3EH Reactor Set-up: Organized in 4 x 3 arrays within an aluminum block, pre-mix catalyst solutions were prepared 8*30 mm vials (containing parylene coated stir-bars) using a pipette or liquid handling robot driven by software (available from Symyx Technologies, Inc., Santa Clara and described within EP 1080435, US 6507645, and EP 1175645).
  • the pre-mix catalyst solutions contain toluene; one or two ligands (0.3 - 1.5 ⁇ mol); a specified group IV metal precursor; a group 13 reagent; and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution).
  • Section 3Eiii Polymerization conditions: Seven different processing conditions were used for these polymerizations, with the conditions being presented in Table 3E by reference to the method number.
  • Method 1 In-situ Complexation: 1 ligand species per' well; 25°C complexation, 105°C reaction temperature; ca. 4 mL total volume per well: The ligand array (1.0 - 2.0 ⁇ mol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (15-60 ⁇ L per well, 0.5 - 1.0 ⁇ mol) were added.
  • the resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 45 - 60 minutes at 25°C within an Al block (pre-mix array).
  • Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 10 min, 25°C), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 2 min, 25°C).
  • Individual aliquots of the solutions contained within the pre-mix array were transferred to 15 mL tarred glass vials containing Teflon coated stir bars; 2.0 mL of styrene, 2.0 ml toluene and a group 13 scavenger (10 ⁇ mol).
  • the vials were housed within a reactor, with its heater pre-set at 105°C temperature; and it stirrer set at 300 - 800 rpm. 2 - 25 minutes post addition of the catalyst solutions, the vials were removed from the reactor; placed into a RT Al block; and 3 mL of cold toluene was injected into each well. The 15 mL vials were then removed from the glove box and transferred to a fume hood to be quenched with 5 mL of methanol.
  • Method 2 In-situ Complexation; 1 ligand species per well; 75°C complexation, 105°C reaction temperature; ca.
  • the ligand array (1.0 - 2.0 ⁇ mol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (15-60 ⁇ L per well, 0.5 - 1.0 ⁇ mol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 45 minutes at 75°C within an Al block (pre-mix array). The pre-mix array was allowed to cool to RT ⁇ ca. 25°C). Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca.
  • Method 4 In-situ Complexation: 1 ligand species per well; 25°C complexation. 125°C reaction temperature; ca. 4 mL total volume per well: Procedure equivalent to Method 1 except: 1) reactor temperature equals 125°C; 2) and 2.0 mL ethylbenzene instead of 2.0 mL toluene as solvent within 15 mL vial.
  • Method 5 In-situ Complexation; 1 ligand species per well; 75°C complexation, 125°C reaction temperature: ca.
  • the ligand array (0.75 ⁇ mol of each ligand 1 & 0.75 ⁇ mol of each ligand 2) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 ⁇ L per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (50 ⁇ L per well, 0.75 ⁇ mol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred (at 25°C) within an Al block (pre-mix array). Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 10 min, 25°C), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 ⁇ L per well, contact time of ca. 2 min, 25°C).
  • Section3Eiv Product Analysis: Post methanol quench, the array was dried over-night in vacuo to remove the liquid phase, followed by 2 - 4 hour drying cycles within a vacuum oven set at 130°C. The vials were weighed via an automated weigh station, to constant weight. 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene (TCB) was added vials which met a minimum yield criteria, and the resulting TCB solutions were heated for 2 hours at 160°C. An aliquot of the hot solution was injected into a rapid HT-GPC in order to determine Mw and PDI. Table 3E present representative results from the styrene homopolymerization reactions performed in a 12- well format.
  • Section 3F Slurry ethylene-1-octene copolymerizations
  • Section 3Fi Preparation of the slurry polymerization reactor: The slurry parallel pressure reactor is described in U.S. Patent 6,759,014, which is incorporated herein by reference. A pre-weighed glass vial insert and disposable stirring paddle were fitted to each reaction vessel of the reactor. The reactor was then closed, 0.200 niL of a 0.02 M solution of tri- «-octylaluminum (Sigma-Aldrich) ("TNOA”) in heptane, 0.125 niL of 1-octene and 4 niL of heptane were injected into, each pressure reaction vessel through a valve.
  • TNOA tri- «-octylaluminum
  • Section 3Fiii Injection of supported catalyst slurries into the slurry pressure reactor vessel Supported catalysts were vortexed at 1200 rpm throughout the experiment and during syringe aspiration prior to delivery of the catalyst to the reactor. A 90-100 uL buffer of heptane followed by 100-150 ⁇ L of the supported catalyst were injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and were followed immediately by injection of heptane to increase the total volume injected to 0.600 mL.
  • Section 3Fiv Polymerization The polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 300-600 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control.
  • the specific times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3F.
  • the polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction. After the reaction time elapsed, the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor.
  • Section 3Fv Product work up After the polymerization reaction, the glass vial insert, containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box, and the volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After most of the volatile components had evaporated, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product. The polymer product was then analyzed by Rapid GPC, to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and by FTIR spectroscopy to determine the mole percent octene incorporated in the polymer as described above.
  • a toluene solution OfZrBz 4 (104 mg, 0.23 mmol, 4 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A13 (200 mg, 0.46 mmol, 12 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the resulting residue was washed with pentane and dried under vacuum (190 mg, 73%).
  • a toluene solution OfHfBz 4 (24 mg, 0.044 mmol, 3mL) was added to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A14 (41 mg, 0.088mmol, 3mL). The mixture was stirred for 35 min at room temperature and the titled complex formed quantitatively as determined by 1 H NMR. The volatiles were removed and a yellow solid product was obtained which was used for polymerization screening without further purification.
  • a toluene solution OfZrBz 4 (35 mg, 0.078 mmol, 2 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A31 (82 mg, 0.155 mmol, 4 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated until almost to dryness and pentane (0.5 mL) was added. The mixture was stored at -35 C for 12 h and an orange solid product was obtained which was then washed with pentane and dried under vacuum. (78mg, 76 %).
  • a toluene solution OfZrBz 4 (103 mg, 0.23 mmol, 6 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol thiazole C14 (206 mg, 0.45 mmol, 8 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed to almost dryness and pentane was added. The mixture was kept at -35 °C for Ih, an orange solid product was collected and dried (265 mg, 99 %).
  • a toluene solution OfZrBz 4 (25 mg, 0.054 mmol, 1 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol thiazole C23 (44 mg, 0.11 mmol, 1.4 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the residue was washed with pentane and dried, light orange solid product was collected (49 mg, 83 %).

Abstract

Ligands, compositions, and metal-ligand complexes that incorporate phenol-heterocyclic compounds are disclosed that are useful in the catalysis of transformations such as the polymerization of monomers into polymers. The catalysts have high performance characteristics, including high comonomer incorporation into ethylene/olefin copolymers, where such olefins are for example, 1-octene, propylene or styrene. The catalysts particularly polymerize styrene to form polystyrene.

Description

PHENOL-HETEROCYCLIC LIGANDS, METAL COMPLEXES, AND THEIR
USES AS CATALYSTS
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0001] The present invention relates to ligands, ligand-metal compositions, complexes, and catalysts useful in the polymerization of olefins and other transformations.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0002] Ancillary (or spectator) ligand-metal coordination complexes (including organometallic complexes) and compositions are useful as catalysts, additives, stoichiometric reagents, solid-state precursors, therapeutic reagents and drugs. Ancillary ligand-metal coordination complexes of this type can be prepared by combining an ancillary ligand with a suitable metal compound or metal precursor in a suitable solvent at a suitable temperature. The ancillary ligand contains functional groups that bind to the metal center(s), remain associated with the metal center(s), and therefore provide an opportunity to modify the steric, electronic and chemical properties of the active metal center(s) of the complex.
[0003] Certain known ancillary ligand-metal complexes and compositions are catalysts for reactions such as oxidation, reduction, hydrogenation, hydrosilylation, hydrocyanation, hydroformylation, polymerization, carbonylation, isomerization, metathesis, carbon-hydrogen activation, carbon-halogen activation, cross-coupling, Friedel-Crafts acylation and alkylation, hydration, Diels-Alder reactions and other transformations.
[0004] One example of the use of these types of ancillary ligand-metal complexes and compositions is in the field of polymerization catalysis. In connection with single site catalysis, the ancillary ligand typically offers opportunities to modify the electronic and/or steric environment surrounding an active metal center. This allows the ancillary ligand to assist in the creation of possibly different polymers. Group 4 metallocene based single site catalysts are generally known for polymerization reactions. See, generally, "Chemistry of Cationic Dicyclopentadienyl Group 4 Metal-Alkyl Complexes", Jordan, Adv. Organometallic Chem. 1991, 32,325-153, and the references therein, all of which is incorporated herein by reference. [0005] One application for metallocene catalysts is producing isotactic polypropylene. An extensive body of scientific literature examines catalyst structures, mechanism and polymers prepared by metallocene catalysts. See, e.g., Resconi et al., "Selectivity in Propene Polymerization with Metallocene Catalysts," Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1253-1345 and G.W. Coates, "Precise Control of Polyolefin Stereochemistry Using Single-Site Metal Catalysts," Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1223-1252 and the references cited in these review articles. Isotactic polypropylene has historically been produced with heterogeneous catalysts that may be described as a catalyst on a solid support (e.g., titanium tetrachloride and aluminum alkyls and additional modifiers or "donors" on magnesium dichloride). This process typically uses hydrogen to control the molecular weight and electron-donor compounds to control the isotacticity. See also EP 0 622 380, EP 0 292 134 and U.S. Patents 4,971,936, 5,093,415, 4,297,465, 5,385,993 and 6,239,236.
[0006] Given the extensive research activities with respect to metallocene catalysts, there is continued interested in the next generation of non-cyclopentadienyl ligands for olefin polymerization catalysts providing attractive alternatives. See, e.g., "The Search for New-Generation Olefin Polymerization Catalysts: Life beyond Metallocenes", Gibson, et al., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 1999, 38, 428-447; Organometallics 1999, 18, 3649-3670 and "Advances in Non-Metallocene Olefin Polymerization Catalysts", Gibson, et al., Chem Rev. 2003, 103, 283-315. See also U.S. Patent No. 6,750,345 and International Application No. WO 02/38628. Recently, for isotactic polypropylene, bis-amide catalysts have been disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,318,935 and amidinate catalysts have been disclosed in WO 99/05186. See also U.S. Patent Nos. 6,214,939 and 6,713,577, and International Application Nos. WO 03/040201 WO 03/091262 for non-metallocene isotactic polypropylene catalysts.
[0007] The polymerization of vinylidene aromatic monomers, especially styrene, has proven difficult to accomplish using non-metallocene catalysts. Recently, Okuda and other researchers have reported the results of their investigations, See, Okuda et al., J. Organometallic Chem., 689 (2004) 4636-4641, Okuda et al., Organometallics, 224, 2971-2982 (2005), WO 2004/078765, Kim, et al., Macromol. Rapid Commun. 2004, 25, 1319-1323, and Proto et al., Macromolecules 2003, 36, 5942-5946. In general, the known processes have been limited to the use of relatively low reaction temperatures and the production of undifferentiated polymers. [0008] Despite the efforts of many workers in the field, a need remains for commercially suitable catalyst systems for the polymerization of monomers, and in particular for the homopolymerization or copolymerization of vinylidene aromatic monomers, especially styrene or substituted styrenes, for the production of polymers having molecular weights high enough for general commercial use, and variable tacticities, at high reaction temperatures, In particular, what is needed is a catalyst or family of catalysts capable of making a range of vinylidene aromatic polymers with differing degrees of stereoregularity that can be controlled by the appropriate choice of catalyst and conditions. A range of product opportunities could then exist, including polymers uniquely suited for preparation via high temperature solution polymerization processes. [0009] Therefore, a need remains for new polyolefin catalysts in general.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0010] The invention features ligands, compositions and metal complexes that are useful in catalysts for olefin polymerization and other transformations, as well as methods for preparing the ligands and for using the compositions or complexes in catalytic transformations such as olefin polymerization, In general, the ligands have a phenol- heterocyclic structure, as will be discussed in more detail below. Catalysts according to the invention can be provided by compositions including a ligand, a metal precursor, and optionally an activator, combination of activators, or an activator technique. Alternatively, catalysts can be provided by metal-ligand complexes and optionally may additionally include an activator, combination of activators or activator technique. [0011] In general, in one aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (I):
Figure imgf000005_0001
[0012] R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, tliioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms. [0013] For compounds of formula (I), X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6V' or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n>» or CR7, wherein each n\ n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided combinations of X1, X2; X1, X3; and X1, X4 are not both N and X1, X2 and X3 are not all N. Additional compounds that are not included are those where X1, X3, X4 are each N, X2 is C, R5 is H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t- butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3, and when R1 is F, R3 is F, X1, X2, X3 are all C, X4 is N, R5, R6 are each H and R7 is t-butyl. [0014] In one aspect for compounds of formula (I), R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl. [0015] In another aspect for compounds of formula (I), R7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl and in particular, R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl. [0016] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is O, X3 is N and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ia). In certain aspects of formula (Ia), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl. In other aspects of formula (Ia), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other aspects of formula (Ia), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[0017] In a second embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is N, X3 is O and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ib). In particular embodiments of formula (Ib), R1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In other embodiments of (Ib), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other embodiments of formula (Ib), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[0018] In third embodiment for compounds of formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is NR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ic). In particular aspects of formula (Ic), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl. In other aspects of formula (Ic), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other aspects of formula (Ic), R5 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In another aspect of formula (Ic), R6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ic), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[0019] In a fourth embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is S, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Id), In one embodiment of formula (Id), R1 is an aryl, substituted aryl, alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In another embodiment of formula (Id), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another embodiment of formula (Id), R6 is a hydrogen, In still yet another embodiment of formula (Id), R7 is bromide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, naplithyl, substituted naphthyl, anthracenyl, substituted anthracenyl, or a hydrogen.
[0020] In a fifth embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X4s C, X2 is CR5, X3 is S and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ie). In one aspect of formula (Ie), R1 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (Ie), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or .a substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ie), R5 is a hydrogen, In still yet another aspect of formula (Ie), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. [0021] hi a sixth embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is N, X2 is CR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (If). In one embodiment of formula (If), R1 is an aryl or substituted aryl. In another embodiment of formula (If), R3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. In still another embodiment of formula (If), R5 is a hydrogen, In still another embodiment of formula (If), R6 is a hydrogen, In still yet another embodiment of formula (If), R7 is an alkyl or phenyl. [0022] In an seventh embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is CR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is NR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ig). In one aspect of formula (Ig), R1 is a halogen. In another aspect of formula (Ig), R2 is a hydrogen or methyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ig), R3 is a halogen. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ig), R5 is a hydrogen. In still another aspect of formula (Ig), R6 is a hydrogen. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ig), R7 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In one aspect for a compound having formula (Ig), R1 and R3 are not both F and R7 is not t- butyl.
[0023] In an additional embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is CR5, X3 is NR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Di). In an additional embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is O, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ii). In an additional embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1Is C, X2 is CR5, X3 is O and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ij). Preferred R groups for these additional embodiments are cliosed from those disclosed for formula (I) through (Ig).
[0024] In general, in one aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (II):
Figure imgf000008_0001
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, are the same or different and are each independent of one another and are as described above.
[0025] For compounds of formula (II), X1 is N or C, X2 is N or CR5, X3 is N or CR6, X4 is N or CR7, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided that compounds when X1, X2, X3 and X4 are each C, R5, R6 and R7 are each H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, - C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3, are not included.
[0026] In one aspect for compounds of formula (II), R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, tliioplienyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothioplienyl.
[0027] In another aspect for compounds of formula (II), R7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothioplienyl and substituted benzothiophenyl
[0028] In still another aspect for compounds having formula (II), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
[0029] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (II), X1 is C, X2 is N, X3is
CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ha). In one aspect of formula (Ha),
R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula
(Ha), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula
(Ha), R6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ha), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[0030] In certain aspects for compounds of formulae (I) through (Ig), (II) and (Ha), R7 is a disubstituted phenyl group, and in particular, a 2,6 disubstituted phenyl group.
[0031] In general, in one aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (III):
Figure imgf000009_0001
[0032] R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R8, R9, R10 and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms.
[0033] For compounds of formula (III), X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided X1 and X2 are not both N.
[0034] In one aspect for compounds of formula (III), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl,ι substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
[0035] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is C, X2 is NR5 and are referred to as formulae (Ilia). In one aspect of formula (Ilia), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (Ilia), R3 is a hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ilia), R5 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
[0036] In a second embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is C and X2 is S and are referred to as formulae (HIb). In one embodiment of formula (HIb), R1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. hi another embodiment of formula (HIb), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
[0037] In a third embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is C and X2 is O and are referred to as formulae (IIIc).
[0038] In a fourth embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is N and X2 is
CR5 and are referred to as formulae (HId). In one aspect of formula (HId), R1 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. In another aspect of formula (IlId), R3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
[0039] In general, in one aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (FV):
Figure imgf000011_0001
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are the same or different and are each independent of each other and are as described above.
[0040] For compounds of formula (IV), X1 is C, X2 is N or CR5, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic.
[0041] In one aspect for compounds having formula (IV), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
[0042] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (IV), X1 is C and X2 is N and are referred to as formulae (IVa). In one aspect of formula (IVa), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (IVa), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In yet another aspect of formula (FVa), R9 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or an alkoxy. In still another aspect of formula (IVa), R10 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, or a substituted alkyl. [0043] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (V):
Figure imgf000011_0002
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are the same or different and are each, independent of each other and are as described above. [0044] For compounds of formula (V), X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n. or CR5, wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided when X1 and X2 are both N, then:
[0045] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0046] R1 is /-propyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4, R8, R9, R10 and R11 are each H;
[0047] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0048] R1 is 1,1-dimethylpropyl, R2 is H, R3 is 1,1-dimethylpropyl, R4, R8, R9, R10 and
R11 are each H;
[0049] R1 is isopropylbenzyl, R2 is H, R3 is isopropylbenzyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0050] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is F;
[0051] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R11 are each H, R9 and R10 are each F;
[0052] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R11 are each H, R9 and R10 are each Cl;
[0053] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is -
CF3;
[0054] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is -
OMe;
[0055] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R11 are each H, R9 and R10 is are each Me;
[0056] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is -OMe, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0057] R1 is phenyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0058] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0059] R1 is 2,4,6-trimethylρhenyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0060] R1 is 1-naphthyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[0061] R1 is 9-anthracenyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is
Cl;
[0062] R1 is 3,5-difluorophenyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and
R10 is Cl;
[0063] R1 is an alkyldiarylsilyl or dialkylarylsilyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
Figure imgf000013_0001
not included.
[0065] In one aspect of compounds having formula (V), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
[0066] In any of the preceding aspects, compositions according to the invention can include a metal precursor or activated metal precursor including a metal selected from groups 3-6 and the lanthanide series of the periodic table of elements, and one or more optional activators. In particular embodiments, the metal precursor can be a compound characterized by the general formula M(L)m, where M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3-6 and lanthanides of the periodic table of elements, and each L is a ligand independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof. Optionally, two or more L groups can be joined into a ring structure, Optionally, one or more of the ligands L can be ionically bonded to the metal M. m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In more particular embodiments, M can be Ti, Zr, and Hf.
[0067] In general, in another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VI):
Figure imgf000014_0001
where M, L and X1 are as described above with the broken bonds representing the compounds having formulae (I) through (Ig), (III) through (HId) and (V) as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. Alternatively, formulae (VI) includes those compounds having formulae (II), (Ha) and (IV) as described above, the nitrogen includes a hydrogen, and m' and x are as described above. The dashed bond shown between the nitrogen atom with M depicted in formula (VI) can be dative, nonexistent, or covalent. In many aspects herein, the phrase the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent is used to indicate additionally that the bond may attach or detach such that the bond fluxuates between dative and absent. This depiction and understanding is used throughout this specification. In an alternative embodiment, the complex may include more than one metal (M) and one or more ligands, each independent of one another, and the ligand to metal ratio may be fractional. [0068] Particular embodiments can include one or more of the following features. In particular embodiments, the complex can be characterized by the formula (VII):
Figure imgf000014_0002
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, X1, X2, X3 and X4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (I) through formulae (Ig); M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent. [0069] In general, in yet another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000015_0001
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, X1, X2, X3 and X4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (II) and (Ha), M and L are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is θ, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
[0070] In certain aspects for complexes of formulae (VII) through (VIIg), (VIII) and (Villa), R7 is a disubstituted phenyl group, and in particular, a 2,6 disubstituted phenyl group.
[0071] In general, in still another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (IX):
Figure imgf000015_0002
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, R11, X1 and X2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (III) through formulae (HId), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3,, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
[0072] In general, in still another aspect', the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (X):
Figure imgf000016_0001
where R1, Rz, Rό, R\ R\ R6, Ry, R, R11, X1 and Xz are as described above for compounds of formulae (IV) and (IVa), M and L are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
[0073] In general, in still yet another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (XI):
Figure imgf000016_0002
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, R11, X1 and X2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (V), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is
0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
[0074] In particular, for the compounds and complexes described throughout the specification, R1 and R7 can be thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, carbazole, substituted carbazoles, indoles and substituted indoles.
[0075] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides bis-ligand complexes, as well as compositions where the ratio of metal to ligand is about one to two. In some embodiments, these bis-ligand systems are those where x is 2 in any of the above metal complex formulae, and in other embodiments, the bis-ligand systems have one ancillary ligand as described in the above formulae and a second ancillary ligand that can generally be within the definition of L. For example, a bis-ligand complex can be
characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000017_0001
wherein each R , R , R , R , R , R , R are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 on the same ring In the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms; X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)n" or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n- or CR7, wherein each n\ n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; X5 is N or C, X6 is O, S5 N(R5)n. or CR5, X7 is O, S, N(R6)n- or CR6, X8 is O, S, N(R7)n- or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; and further provided that in the selection of the C, N, O or S atom, at least, either X1 and X5 are different or X2 and X6 are different or X3 and X7 are different or X4 and X8 are different; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; m" is 0, 1, 2, or 3; and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogens (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
[0076] In general, in still another aspect, the invention provides arrays of materials. The arrays include a substrate having at least 8 members associated with regions of the substrate. Each array member is different from the other members of the array. Each array member includes a compound, composition or complex according to one of the aspects described above.
[0077] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides catalytic methods. In the methods, one or more reagents is reacted in the presence of a catalyst comprising a composition or complex as described above, and optionally one or more activators, under conditions sufficient to yield one or more reaction products.
[0078] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides polymerization processes that employ the composition or complexes of the invention, optionally in the presence of at least one activator. In particular embodiments, the activator can include an ion forming activator and, optionally, a group 13 reagent. The activator can include an alumoxane.
[0079] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides a process for the polymerization of an alpha-olefin. According to the process, at least one alpha-olefin is polymerized in the presence of a catalyst formed from a composition or complex of the invention, optionally in the presence of one or more activators, under polymerization conditions sufficient to form a substantially stereoregular polymer.
[0080] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides a process for polymerizing ethylene and at least one alpha-olefin. According to the process, ethylene is polymerized in the presence of at least one alpha-olefin in the presence of a catalyst formed from a composition or complex of the invention, optionally in the presence of one or more activators.
[0081] Particular embodiments can include one or more of the following features. The at least one alpha-olefin can include propylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 1-octene, 1-decene, styrene or substituted styrene. The process can be a solution process, and can be operated under polymerization conditions that include a temperature of at least 100°C, or at least 125°C. [0082] In general, in. another aspect, the invention provides a process for polymerizing at least one monomer. The process includes providing a reactor with reactor contents including at least one polymerizable monomer and a composition or complex of the invention, and subjecting the reactor contents to polymerization conditions. In particular embodiments, the at least one polymerizable monomer can include ethylene and propylene, ethylene and 1-hexene, ethylene and 1-butene, 1-octene, 1-decene, ethylene and styrene, ethylene and a cyclic alkene, ethylene and a diene, or ethylene, propylene, and a diene selected from the group consisting of ethylidenenorbornene, dicyclopentadiene, and 1,4-hexadiene.
[0083] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides a process for the polymerization of a polymerizable monomer. According to the process, a composition or complex of the invention is provided, the composition or complex is optionally activated, and at least one polymerizable monomer is polymerized in the presence of the activated composition or complex to produce a distribution of product polymers that is at least bimodal by one or more of molecular weight or composition. [0084] The invention can be implemented to provide one or more of the following advantages. The ligands, compositions, complexes and polymerization methods of the invention can be used to provide catalysts exhibiting enhanced activity. Catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and/or complexes can be used to catalyze a variety of transformations, such as olefin oligomerization (specifically dimerization, trimerization and tetramerization) or polymerization. By selecting an appropriate ligand and metal, compositions and/or complexes can be obtained to provide for desired properties in the resulting product. Thus, polymers produced using the ligands, compositions, complexes, and methods of the invention can exhibit higher (or lower) melting points, higher (or lower) molecular weights, and/or higher (or lower) polydispersities, than polymers produced using prior known catalysts. In some embodiments, polymer products having bi- or multi-modal distributions of product composition and/or molecular weight can be obtained by selecting a single catalyst precursor and activating it under certain conditions. Catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and/or complexes can be used according to the polymerization methods of the invention to produce polymers under commercially desirable polymerization conditions. Catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and complexes of the invention can exhibit catalytic activity at higher temperatures than prior known catalysts. Copolymerization processes {e.g., ethylene/α-olefin copolymerizations) using the ligands, compositions and complexes of the invention can exhibit higher (or lower) comonomer incorporation than processes involving prior known catalysts. Chiral compositions and/or complexes according to the invention can be used to catalyze stereoselective, enantioselective or diastereoselective transformations.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0085] Figure 1 is an X-ray structure determination of complex M1 of the invention.
[0086] Figure 2 is a list of certain ligands that comprise Tables 1-7, in accord with the invention herein.
[0087] Figure 3 is a list of certain metal-ligand complexes in accord with the inventions herein.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0088] The invention provides ligands, compositions and complexes that are useful as catalysts for a variety of transformations, including olefin polymerization reactions. [0089] As used herein, the phrase "characterized by the formula" is not intended to be limiting and is used in the same way that "comprising" is commonly used. The term "independently selected" is used herein to indicate that the groups in question ~ e.g., R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, etc. - can be identical or different (e.g., R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, etc. may all be substituted alkyls, or R1 and R2 may be a substituted alkyl and R3 may be an aryl, etc.). When two or more specific R groups appear in a formula, they can also be the same or different from each other; for example, if R1 appears twice in a formula (e.g., formula XX), then each occurance of R1 can be the same or different from the other occurances. Use of the singular includes use of the plural and vice versa (e.g., a hexane solvent, includes hexanes). A named R group will generally have the structure that is recognized in the art as corresponding to R groups having that name. The terms "compound" and "complex" are generally used interchangeably in this specification, but those of skill in the art may recognize certain compounds as complexes and vice versa. For the purposes of illustration, representative certain groups are defined herein. These definitions are intended to supplement and illustrate, not preclude, the definitions known to those of skill in the art. [0090] "Optional" or "optionally" means that the subsequently described event or circumstance may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where the event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not. For example, the phrase "optionally substituted hydrocarbyl" means that a hydrocarbyl moiety may or may not be substituted and that the description includes both unsubstituted hydrocarbyl and hydrocarbyl where there is substitution.
[0091] The term "substituted" as in "substituted hydrocarbyl," "substituted aryl," "substituted alkyl," and the like, means that in the group in question {i.e., the hydrocarbyl, alkyl, aryl or other moiety that follows the term), at least one hydrogen atom bound to a carbon atom is replaced with one or more substituent groups such as hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, phosphino, amino, halo, silyl, and the like. When the term "substituted" introduces a list of possible substituted groups, it is intended that the term apply to every member of that group. That is, the phrase "substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl" is to be interpreted as "substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl and substituted alkynyl." Similarly, "optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl" is to be interpreted as "optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl and optionally substituted alkynyl."
[0092] The term "saturated" refers to the lack of double and triple bonds between atoms of a radical group such as ethyl, cyclohexyl, pyrrolidinyl, and the like. The term "unsaturated" refers to the presence of one or more double and triple bonds between atoms of a radical group such as vinyl, allyl, acetylide, oxazolinyl, cyclohexenyl, acetyl and the like, and specifically includes alkenyl and alkynyl groups, as well as groups in which double bonds are delocalized, as in aryl and heteroaryl groups as defined below. [0093] The terms "cyclo" and "cyclic" are used herein to refer to saturated or unsaturated radicals containing a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Suitable cyclic moieties include, for example, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctenyl, bicyclooctyl, phenyl, napthyl, pyrrolylj furyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, and the like, In particular embodiments, cyclic moieties include between 3 and 200 atoms other than hydrogen, between 3 and 50 atoms other than hydrogen or between 3 and 20 atoms other than hydrogen.
[0094] The term "hydrocarbyl" refers to hydrocarbyl radicals containing 1 to about 50 carbon atoms, specifically 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, most specifically 1 to about 16 carbon atoms, including branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, saturated or unsaturated species, such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aryl groups, and the like. [0095] The term "alkyl" as used herein refers to a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 1 to about 50 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, ^-propyl, isopropyl, «-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, octyl, decyl, and the like, as well as cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkyl groups herein may contain 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.
[0096] The term "alkenyl" as used herein refers to a branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 2 to about 50 carbon atoms and at least one double bond, such as ethenyl, rø-propenyl, isopropenyl, n- butenyl, isobutenyl, octenyl, decenyl, and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkenyl groups herein contain 2 to about 20 carbon atoms. [0097] The term "alkynyl" as used herein refers to a branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic hydrocarbon group typically although not necessarily containing 2 to about 50 carbon atoms and at least one triple bond, such as ethynyl, n-propynyl, isopropynyl, n- butynyl, isobutynyl, octynyl, decynyl, and the like. Generally, although again not necessarily, alkynyl groups herein may have 2 to about 20 carbon atoms. [0098] The term "aromatic" is used in its usual sense, including unsaturation that is essentially delocalized across several bonds around a ring. The term "aryl" as used herein refers to a group containing an aromatic ring. Aryl groups herein include groups containing a single aromatic ring or multiple aromatic rings that are fused together, linked covalently, or linked to a common group such as a methylene or ethylene moiety. More specific aryl groups contain one aromatic ring or two or three fused or linked aromatic rings, e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, anthracenyl, or phenanthrenyl. In particular embodiments, aryl substituents include 1 to about 200 atoms other than hydrogen, typically 1 to about 50 atoms other than hydrogen, and specifically 1 to about 20 atoms other than hydrogen, In some embodiments herein, multi-ring moieties are substituents and in such embodiments the multi-ring moiety can be attached at an appropriate atom. For example, "naphthyl" can be 1 -naphthyl or 2-naphthyl; "anthracenyl" can be 1 -anthracenyl, 2-anthracenyl or 9-anthracenyl; and "phenanthrenyl" can be 1 -phenanthrenyl, 2-phenanthrenyl, 3 -phenanthrenyl, 4-phenanthrenyl or 9- phenanthrenyl. [0099] The term "alkoxy" as used herein intends an alkyl group bound through a single, terminal ether linkage; that is, an "alkoxy" group may be represented as -O-alkyl where alkyl is as defined above. The term "aryloxy" is used in a similar fashion, and may be represented as -O-aryl, with aryl as defined below. The term "hydroxy" refers to -OH. [00100] Similarly, the term "alkylthio" as used herein intends an alkyl group bound through a single, terminal thioether linkage; that is, an "alkylthio" group may be represented as -S-alkyl where alkyl is as defined above. The term "arylthio" is used similarly, and may be represented as -S-aryl, with aryl as defined below. The term "mercapto" refers to -SH.
[00101] The terms "halo" and "halogen" are used in the conventional sense to refer to a chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo radical.
[00102] The terms "heterocycle" and "heterocyclic" refer to a cyclic radical, including ring-fused systems, including heteroaryl groups as defined below, in which one or more carbon atoms in a ring is replaced with a heteroatom - that is, an atom other than carbon, such as nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron or silicon. Heterocycles and heterocyclic groups include saturated and unsaturated moieties, including heteroaryl groups as defined below. Specific examples of heterocycles include pyrrolidine, pyrroline, furan, tetrahydrofuran, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, indole, and the like, including any isomers of these. Additional heterocycles are described, for example, in Alan R. Katritzky, Handbook of Heterocyclic Chemistiγ, Pergammon Press, 1985, and in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, A.R. Katritzky et ah, eds, Elsevier, 2d. ed., 1996. The term "metallocycle" refers to a heterocycle in which one or more of the heteroatoms in the ring or rings is a metal.
[00103] The term "heteroaryl" refers to an aryl radical that includes one or more heteroatoms in the aromatic ring. Specific heteroaryl groups include groups containing heteroaromatic rings such as thiophene, pyridine, pyrazine, isoxazole, pyrazole, pyrrole, furan, thiazole, oxazole, imidazole, isothiazole, oxadiazole, triazole, and benzo-fused analogues of these rings, such as indole, carbazole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazoles, indazole and the like and isomers thereof, e.g., reverse isomers.
[00104] More generally, the modifiers "hetero" and "heteroatom-containing", as in "heteroalkyl" or "heteroatom-containing hydrocarbyl group" refer to a molecule or molecular fragment in which one or more carbon atoms is replaced with a heteroatom. Thus, for example, the term "heteroalkyl" refers to an alkyl substituent that is heteroatom-containing. When the terai "heteroatom-containing" introduces a list of possible heteroatom-containing groups, it is intended that the term apply to every member of that group. That is, the phrase "heteroatom-containing alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl" is to be interpreted as "heteroatom-containing alkyl, heteroatom-contaming alkenyl and heteroatom-containing alkynyl."
[00105] By "divalent" as in "divalent hydrocarbyl", "divalent alkyl", "divalent aryl" and the like, is meant that the hydrocarbyl, alkyl, aryl or other moiety is bonded at two points to atoms, molecules or moieties with the two bonding points being covalent bonds.
[00106] As used herein the term "silyl" refers to the -SiZ1Z2Z3 radical, where each of Z1, Z2, and Z3 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroatom-containing alkyl, heteroatom- containing alkenyl, heteroatom-containing alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, silyl and combinations thereof.
[00107] As used herein the term "boryl" refers to the -BZ1Z2 group, where each of
Z1 and Z2 is as defined above. As used herein, the term "phosphino" refers to the group -PZ Z , where each of Z and Z is as defined above. As used herein, the term "phosphine" refers to the group :PZ1Z2Z3, where each of Z1, Z3and Z2 is as defined above. The term "amino" is used herein to refer to the group -NZ1Z2, where each of Z1 and Z2 is as defined above. The term "amine" is used herein to refer to the group INZ1Z2Z3, where each of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is as defined above.
[00108] In this specification, ligand binding is sometimes referred to as (2,1) complexation or (2,2) complexation, with the first number representing the number of coordinating atoms and second number representing the number of anionic sites on the phenol-heterocycle ligand, when the metal-ligand bonding is considered from an ionic bonding model perspective, with the metal considered to be cationic and the ligand considered to be anionic. From a covalent bonding model perspective, a (2,1) complex may be considered to be a complex in which the phenol-heterocycle ligand is bound to the metal center via one covalent bond and one dative bond, while a (2,2) complex may be considered to be a complex in which the phenol-heterocycle ligand is bound to the metal' center via two covalent bonds. Examples of (2,1) complexation include the complex examples labeled M1 through M30 as listed below. Additionally, in certain embodiments, a covalent bond or dative bond may be formed from R1, R7 or R11 to the metal, to form a (3,2) complex, or (3,1) complex respectively. For example, where R1, R7 or R11 is an aryl or heteroaryl, C-H activation may occur to form a (3,2) complex, or where R1, R7 or R11 is a heteroatom-containing group, a dative bond may be found from heteroatom to metal to give a (3,1) complex.
[00109] It should be noted that the complexes can include "mono" ligand and
"bis" ligand complexes. Examples of "mono" ligand complexes, where a single phenol- heterocycle ligand is complexed to the metal atom include M7 and M8. Examples of "bis" ligand complexes include, M1 through M6 and M9 through M30. Figure 1 depicts "bis" ligand complex M1. It should also be understood that "bis" ligands can include two different phenol-heterocycle ligands. Examples of bis-liagnd complexes of two different phenol-heterocycle ligands include M13, M15, M17, M19, M21 and M23. [00110] Other abbreviations used herein include: "Cbz" to refer to N-carbazole;
"1Pr" to refer to isopropyl; "*Bu" to refer to tert-butyl; "Me" to refer to methyl; "Et" to refer to ethyl; "Ph" to refer to phenyl; "Mes" to refer to mesityl (2,4,6-trimethyl phenyl); "TFA" to refer to trifluoroacetate and "THF" to refer to tetrahydrofuran. [00111] The ligands according to the invention can be characterized broadly as monoanionic ligands having a phenol and a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic group. Preferred ligand substituents for some particular monomers are described in more detail below. In some embodiments, the ligands of the invention can be characterized by the following (I):
Figure imgf000025_0001
[00112] R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms.
[00113]. For compounds of formula (I), X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5V or CR5,
X3 is O, S, N(R6V or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7V- or CR7, wherein each n\ n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided combinations of X1, X2; X1, X3; and X1, X4 are not both N and X1, X2 and X3 are not all N. Additional compounds that are not included are those where X1, X3, X4 are each N, X2 is C, R5 is H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t- butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3, and when R1 is F, R3 is F, X1, X2, X3 are all C, X4 is N, R5, R6 are each H and R7 is t-butyl. [00114] Additionally, the compounds and complexes disclosed in US Patent No.
6,333,389, issued to Whiteker et al. on December 25, 2001 and US Patent Publication No. US 2003/0232717 Al to Brummer et al, published December 18, 2003 are excluded from the present invention.
[00115] In formulae presented throughout this specification, the presence of one solid line and one dashed line between any pair of atoms is intended to indicate that the bond in question may be a single bond or a double bond, or a bond with bond order intermediate between single and double, such as the delocalized bonding in an aromatic ring.
[00116] In one aspect for compounds of formula (I) and the below formulas, R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
[00117] In another aspect for compounds of formula (I), R7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl and in particular, R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl. [00118] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is O,
X3 is N and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ia):
Figure imgf000027_0001
[00119] In certain aspects of formula (Ia), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl. In other aspects of formula (Ia), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other aspects of formula (Ia), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ia) include those set out in Figure 2 as "A" ligands.
[00120] In a second embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is
N, X3 is O and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ib):
Figure imgf000027_0002
[00121] In particular embodiments of formula (Ib), R1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In other embodiments of (Ib), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other embodiments of formula (Ib), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ib) includes those set out in Figure 2 as "B" ligands. [00122] In third embodiment for compounds of formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is NR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ic):
Figure imgf000027_0003
[00123] In particular aspects of formula (Ic), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or a substituted heteroaryl. In other aspects of formula (Ic), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other aspects of formula (Ic), R5 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In another aspect of formula (Ic), R6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ic), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ic) include those set out in Figure 2 as "F" ligands.
[00124] In a fourth embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is
S, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Id):
Figure imgf000028_0001
[00125] In one embodiment of formula (Id), R1 is an aryl, substituted aryl; alkyl, substituted alkyl, heteroaryl or a substituted heteroaryl. In another embodiment of formula (Id), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another embodiment of formula (Id), R6 is a hydrogen. In still yet another embodiment of formula (Id), R7 is a halide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, anthracenyl, substituted anthracenyl, or a hydrogen. Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Id) include those set out in Figure 5 as "C" ligands.
[00126] In a fifth embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is
CR5, X3 is S and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ie):
Figure imgf000028_0002
[00127] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ie) includes those set out in Figure 2 as "D" ligands. [00128] In one aspect of formula (Ie), R1 is an aryl, substituted aryl, hetroaryl or substituted heteroaryl. In another aspect of formula (Ie), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ie), R5 is a hydrogen. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ie), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[00129] In a sixth embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is N, X2 is
CR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (If):
Figure imgf000029_0001
[00130] In one embodiment of formula (If), R1 is an aryl or substituted aryl. In another embodiment of formula (If), R3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. In still another embodiment of formula (If), R5 is a hydrogen. In still another embodiment of formula (If), R6 is a hydrogen. In still yet another embodiment of formula (If), R7 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (If) include those set out in Figure 2 as "G" ligands. [00131] In a seventh embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is CR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is NR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ig):
Figure imgf000029_0002
[00132] In one aspect of formula (Ig), R1 is a halogen. In another aspect of formula (Ig), R2 is a hydrogen or methyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ig), R3 is a halogen. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ig), R5 is a hydrogen, In still another aspect of formula (Ig), R6 is a hydrogen, In still yet another aspect of formula (Ig), R7 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, formulae (Ig) do not include the compounds where R1 and R3 are fluorine and R7 is a t-butyl.
[00133] In further embodiments for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is
CR5, X3 is NR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ih). In an additional embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is O, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ii). In an additional embodiment for compounds having formula (I), X1 is C, X2 is CR5, X3 is O and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ij). These embodiments are drawn as:
Figure imgf000030_0001
[00134] Preferred R groups for these additional embodiments are chosed from those disclosed for formula (I) through (Ig).
[00135] In some embodiments, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (II):
Figure imgf000030_0002
[00136] where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, are each independent of one another and are as described above.
[00137] For compounds of formula (II), X1 is N or C, X2 is N or CR5, X3 is N or
CR6, X4 is N or CR7, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided that compounds when X1, X2, X3 and X4 are each C, R5, R6 and
R7 are each H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -
CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3, are not included.
[00138] In one aspect for compounds of formula (II), R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothioplienyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
[00139] In another aspect for compounds of formula (II), R7 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl
[00140] In still another aspect for compounds having formula (II), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
[00141] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (II), X1 is C, X2 is
N, X3is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Ha):
Figure imgf000031_0001
[00142] In one aspect of formula (Ha), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or a substituted heteroaryl. In another aspect of formula (Ha), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ha), R6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In still yet another aspect of formula (Ha), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ha) include those set out in Figure 2 as "E" ligands.
[00143] In general, in one aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (III):
Figure imgf000032_0001
[00144] R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R8, R9, R10 and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms. [00145] For compounds of formula (III), X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided X and X are not both N.
[00146] In one aspect for compounds of formula (III), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
[00147] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is C, X2 is
NR5 and are referred to as formulae (Ilia):
Figure imgf000032_0002
[00148] hi one aspect of formula (Ilia), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (Ilia), R3 is a hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (Ilia), R5 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Ilia) include FI l and F12 set forth in Figure 2.
[00149] In a second embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X*is C and
X2 is S and are referred to as formulae (HIb):
Figure imgf000033_0001
[00150] In one embodiment of formula (HIb), R1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
In another embodiment of formula (HIb), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (HIb) include C29 those set forth in Figure 2.
[00151] In a third embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is C and X2 is O and are referred to as formulae (IIIc):
Figure imgf000033_0002
[00152] In a fourth embodiment for compounds having formula (III), X1 is N and
X is CR and are referred to as formulae (HId):
Figure imgf000033_0003
[00153] In one aspect of formula (HId), R1 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. In another aspect of formula (HId), R3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. Suitable example of a ligand within the scope of formula (HId) includes G4 set out in Figure 2. [00154] In general, in one aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (IV):
Figure imgf000034_0001
[00155] where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are each independent of each other and are as described above.
[00156] For compounds of formula (IV), X1 C, X2 N or CR5, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic.
[00157] In one aspect for compounds having formula (IV), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
[00158] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (FV), X1 is C and X2 is N and are referred to as formulae (IVa)
Figure imgf000034_0002
[00159] In one aspect of formula (FVa), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (FVa), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In yet another aspect of formula (FVa), R9 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or an alkoxy. In still another aspect of formula (IVa), R10 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, or a substituted alkyl.
[00160] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IVa) include those set forth in Table 10, shown in Figure 7.
[00161] In general, in another aspect, the invention provides compositions of matter, including ligands, compositions and metal-ligand complexes, that include a compound characterized by the formula (V):
Figure imgf000035_0001
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are each independent of each other and are as described above.
[00162] For compounds of formula (V), X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n- or CR5, wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided when X1 and X2 are both N, then:
[00163] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is
Cl;
[00164] R1 is i-propyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4, R8, R9, R10 and R11 are each H;
[00165] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[00166] R1 is 1,1-dimethylpropyl, R2 is H, R3 is 1,1-dimethylproρyl, R4, R8, R9,
R10 and R11 are each H;
Figure imgf000035_0002
[00167] R1 is isopropylbenzyl, R2 is H, R3 is isopropylbenzyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[00168] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is F;
[00169] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R11 are each H, R9 and R10 are each F; [00170] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is /-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R11 are each H, R9 and R10 are each Cl;
[00171] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is -CF3;
[00172] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is -OMe;
[00173] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R11 are each H, R9 and R10 is are each Me;
[00174] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is -OMe, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[00175] R1 is phenyl, R2 is H, R3 is t-butyl, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[00176] R1 is t-butyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is
Cl;
[00177] R1 is 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[00178] R1 is 1-naphthyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and
R10 is Cl;
[00179] R1 is 9-anthracenyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl;
[00180] R1 is 3,5-difluorophenyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8, R9, R11 are each
H and R10 is Cl;
[00181] R1 is an alkyldiarylsilyl or dialkylarylsilyl, R2 is H, R3 is -Me, R4 is H, R8,
R9, R11 are each H and R10 is Cl; but
Figure imgf000037_0002
Figure imgf000037_0001
not included.
[00182] In one aspect of compounds having formula (V), R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
[00183] It should be understood that in the compounds identified as (Ia) through
(Ij), (Ha), (Ilia) through (HId), (IVa), etc. and complexes thereof, that the substituent R1 through R11, if present in the molecule, and not specifically identified, are as defined throughout the specification.
[00184] More specifically, for compounds (Ia) through (Ij) and (Ha), R1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl. In other embodiments, R1 can be selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, N-carbazolyl, substituted N-carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzotliiophenyl.
[00185] Additionally, for compounds of formulae (Ia) through (Ij) and (Ha), R7 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl; more specifically, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, indolyl, substituted indolyl, adamantyl, substituted adamantyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, benzofuranyl, substituted benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl and substituted benzothiophenyl.
[00186] The choice of particular heterocyclic ligand can have a strong influence on the catalysis of particular transformations. Thus, the choice of substituent in the ligands of the invention when incorporated in a polymerization catalyst can affect catalyst activity, thermal stability, molecular weight of the product polymer, or the degree and/or kind of stereo- or regioerrors, as well as other factors known to be significant in the production of various polymers.
[00187] Specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of polypropylene are specified in Tables 2C, 3 A and 3B. Additionally, specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of low molecular weight polypropylene waxes are specified in Table 3A, examples PP3-PP7, and Table 3B. Specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of ethlyene-1-octene copolymersare specified in Tables 3C and 3D. Specific ligands, metal precursors and activation techniques that are used for the production of polystyene are specified in Tables 3E. [00188] The ligands of the invention can be prepared using known procedures, such as those described, for example, in March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, Wiley, New York 1992 (4th Ed.), and in Katritzky et al, Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, Elsevier, New York 1984 (1st Ed.) & 1996 (2nd Ed.). Specifically, in some embodiments the ligands of the invention can be prepared according to the general procedures that follow.
[00189] Once the desired ligand is formed, it can be combined with a metal atom, ion, compound or other metal precursor compound, and in some embodiments the present invention encompasses compositions that include any of the above-mentioned ligands in combination with an appropriate metal precursor and an optional activator. For example, in some embodiments, the metal precursor can be an activated metal precursor, which refers to a metal precursor (described below) that has been combined or reacted with an activator (described below) prior to combination or reaction with the ancillary ligand. As noted above, in one aspect the invention provides compositions that include such combinations of ligand and metal atom, ion, compound or precursor. In some applications, the ligands are combined with a metal compound or precursor and the product of such combination is not determined, if a product forms. For example, the ligand may be added to a reaction vessel at the same time as the metal or metal precursor compound along with the reactants, activators, scavengers, etc. Additionally, the ligand can be modified prior to addition to or after the addition of the metal precursor, e.g. through a deprotonation reaction or some other modification.
[00190] In general, the metal precursor compounds can be characterized by the general formula M(L)m where M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3-6 and lanthanides of the periodic table of elements and m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. Thus, in particular embodiments M can be selected from scandium, yttrium, titanium, zirconium, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, samarium, europium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium, and lutetium. Each L is a ligand independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof. Optionally, two or more L groups are joined into a ring structure. One or more of the ligands L may be ionically bonded to the metal M and, for example, L may be a non-coordinated or loosely coordinated or weakly coordinated anion (e.g., L may be selected from the group consisting of those anions described below in the conjunction with the activators). (See Marks et al., Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1391-1434, for a detailed discussion of these weak interactions.) The metal precursors may be monomeric, dimeric or higher orders thereof. In particular embodiments, the metal precursor includes a metal selected from Ti, Zr, or Hf. In more specific embodiments, the metal precursor includes a metal selected from Zr and Hf. [00191] Specific examples of suitable titanium, hafnium and zirconium precursors include, but are not limited to TiCl4, Ti(CH2Ph)4, Ti(CH2CMe3)4, Ti(CH2SiMe3)4, Ti(CH2Ph)3Cl, Ti(CH2CMe3)3Cl, Ti(CH2SiMe3)3Cl, Ti(CH2Ph)2Cl2, Ti(CH2CMe3)2Cl2, Ti(CH2SiMe3)2Cl2, Ti(NMe2)4, Ti(NEt2)4, Ti(O-iPr)4, and Ti(N(SiMe3)2)2Cl2; HfCl4, Hf(CH2Ph)4, Hf(CH2CMe3)4, Hf(CH2SiMe3)4, Hf(CH2Ph)3Cl, Hf(CH2CMe3)3Cl, Hf(CH2SiMe3)3α Hf(CH2Ph)2Cl2, Hf(CH2CMe3)2Cl2, Hf(CH2SiMe3)2Cl2, Hf(NMe2)4, Hf(NEt2)4, and Hf(N(SiMe3)2)2Cl2, Hf(N(SiMe3)CH2CH2CH2N(SiMe3))Cl2, Hf(N(Ph)CH2CH2CH2N(Ph))Cl2, ZrCl4, Zr(CH2Ph)4, Zr(CH2CMe3)4, Zr(CH2SiMe3)4, Zr(CH2Ph)3Cl, Zr(CH2CMe3)3Cl, Zr(CH2SiMe3)3Cl, Zr(CH2Ph)2Cl2, Zr(CH2CMe3)2Cl2, Zr(CH2SiMe3)2Cl2, Zr(NMe2)4, Zr(NEt2)4, Zr(NMe2)2Cl2, Zr(NEt2)2Cl2, Zr(N(SiMe3)2)2Cl2) Zr(N(SiMe3)CH2 CH2CH2N(SiMe3))Cl2, and
Zr(N(Ph)CH2CH2CH2N(Ph))Cl2. Lewis base adducts of these examples are also suitable as metal precursors, for example, ethers, amines, thioethers, phosphines and the like are suitable as Lewis bases. Specific examples include HfCl4(THF)2, HfCl4(SMe2)2 and Hf(CH2Ph)2Cl2(OEt2). Activated metal precursors may be ionic or zwitterionic compounds, such as [M(CH2Ph)3 +] [B(C6F5)_π or [M(CH2Ph)3 +] [PhCH2B(C6Fs)3 ^l where M is Zr or Hf. Activated metal precursors or such ionic compounds can be prepared in the manner shown in Pelleccliia et al., Organometallics 1994, 13, 298-302; Pellecchia et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1993, 115, 1160-1162; Pellecchia et al., Organometallics 1993, 13, 3773-3775 and Bochmann et al., Organometallics 1993, 12, 633-640, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00192] The ligand to metal precursor compound ratio is typically in the range of about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, more specifically in the range of about 0.1:1 to about 10:1 and even more specifically about 1:1, 2:1 or 3:1.
[00193] As noted above, in another aspect, this invention relates to compositions of one or more ligands and a metal precursor compound, where the compositions include two equivalents of ligand to metal precursor compound, referred to herein as the bis- ligand embodiment. The other aspects, there is also a bis-ligand complex embodiment, specifically, those embodiments where x is 2 in the below complexation formulae. The bis-ligand composition embodiment can include two equivalents of the same phenol- heterocycle ligand or one equivalent of a first phenol-heterocycle ligand and one equivalent of a second phenol-heterocycle ligand, wherein the first and second phenol- heterocycle ligands are different from each other. In other embodiments, the ratio of first phenol-heterocycle ligand to second phenol-heterocycle ligand is not one to one, but ranging from 1 to 99 parts to 99 to 1 parts. In some embodiments, in addition, the first phenol-heterocycle ligand is a ligand of this invention and the second phenol-heterocycle ligand is otherwise known. For example in some embodiments, the second phenol- heterocycle ligand can be a triazole ligand, such as those disclosed in US Patent 6,933,355, incorporated herein by reference. Triazole ligands that may be used as second phenol-heterocycle ligands in bis-ligand compositions (and complexes) include those characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000041_0001
[00194] wherein R8, R9, R10 and R11 are selected from the same groups as R1, R2,
R3, and R4, defined in the various embodiments above. Specific examples of ligands that may be preferably used as second phenol-heterocycle ligands in bis-ligand are shown in the various examples and figures herein. See the following for general mixed ligand systems: J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2004, 126, 10798-10799; Chem. Common. 2005, 25, 3150- 3152; and Dalton Trans. 2005, 3611-3613, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00195] As also noted above, in another aspect the invention relates to metal- ligand complexes. Generally, the ligand (or optionally a modified ligand as discussed above) is mixed with a suitable metal precursor (and optionally other components, such as activators) prior to or simultaneously with allowing the mixture to be contacted with the reactants (e.g., monomers). When the ligand is mixed with the metal precursor compound, a metal-ligand complex may be formed, which may itself be an active catalyst or may be transformed into a catalyst upon activation.
[00196] The invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VI):
Figure imgf000041_0002
where M, L and X1 are as described above with the broken bonds representing the compounds having formulae (I) through (Ig), (III) through (HId) and (V) as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Alternatively, formulae (VI) includes those compounds having formulae (II), (Ha) and (IV) as described above, the nitrogen includes a hydrogen, and m' and x are as described above. The dashed bond shown between the nitrogen atom with M depicted in formula (VI) can be dative, nonexistent, or covalent. When the bond is intended to be a dative bond, it is shown as a dashed arrow. The bond between the nitrogen atom and the metal (M) may come on and off again, giving it fluxional behavior, and thus any of the formula here can be drawn without that bond. Again, when x is 2 or higher, compounds may include those of formula (Va) as one of the bis-ligand compounds. This depiction is used throughout, herein, In an alternative embodiment, the complex may include more than one metal (M) and one or more ligands, each independent of one another, and the ligand to metal ratio may be fractional.
[00197] Particular embodiments can include one or more of the following features.
In particular embodiments, the complex can be characterized by the formula (VII):
Figure imgf000042_0001
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, X1, X2, X3 and X4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (I) through formulae (Ig); M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4, m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogen (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
[00198] For example, in a first embodiment for complexes having formula (VII),
X1 is C, X2 is O, X3 is N and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Vila):
Figure imgf000043_0001
[00199] In certain aspects of formula (Vila), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl. In other aspects of formula (Vila), R is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other aspects of formula (Vila), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. [00200] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Vila) include those set out in Table 1.
[00201] In a second embodiment for complexes having formula (VII), X1 is C, X2 is N, X3 is O and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIb):
Figure imgf000043_0002
[00202] In particular embodiments of formula (VIIb)5 R1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In other embodiments of (VIIb), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
In still other embodiments of formula (VIIb), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[00203] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIIb) includes those set out in Table 2.
[00204] In third embodiment for complexes of formula (VII), X1 is C, X2 is NR5,
X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIc):
Figure imgf000044_0001
[00205] In particular aspects of formula (VIIc), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl. In other aspects of formula (VIIc), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still other aspects of formula (VIIc), R5 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In another aspect of formula (VIIc), R6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In still yet another aspect of formula (VIIc), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[00206] Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIIc) include those set out in Table 3.
[00207] In a fourth embodiment for complexes having formula (VII), X1 is C, X2 is S, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIId):
Figure imgf000044_0002
[00208] In one embodiment of formula (VIId), R1 is an aryl, substituted aryl, alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In another embodiment of formula (VIId), R3 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another embodiment of formula (VIId), R6 is a hydrogen. In still yet another embodiment of formula (VIId), R7 is bromide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, anthracenyl, substituted anthracenyl, or a hydrogen.
[00209] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIId) include those set out in Table 5. [00210] In a fifth embodiment for complexes having formula (VII), X1 is C, X2 is
CR5, X3 is S and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIe):
Figure imgf000045_0001
[00211] In one aspect of formula (VIIe), R1 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (VIIe), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (VIIe), R5 is a hydrogen. In still yet another aspect of formula (VIIe), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl.
[00212] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIIe) includes those set out in Table 6.
[00213] In a sixth embodiment for complexes having formula (VII), X1 is N, X2 is
CR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIf):
Figure imgf000045_0002
[00214] In one embodiment of formula (VIIf), R1 is an aryl or substituted aryl. In another embodiment of formula (VIIf), R3 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. In still another embodiment of formula (VIIf), R5 is a hydrogen. In still another embodiment of formula (VIIf), R6 is a hydrogen. In still yet another embodiment of formula (VIIf), R7 is an alkyl or phenyl.
[00215] Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (VIIf) include those set out in Table 7. [00216] In an seventh embodiment for complexes having formula (VII), X1 is C,
X2 is CR5, X3 is CR6 and X4 is NR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIg):
Figure imgf000046_0001
[00217] In one aspect of formula (VIIg), R1 is a halogen. In another aspect of formula (VIIg), R2 is a hydrogen or methyl. In still another aspect of formula (VIIg), R3 is a halogen. In still yet another aspect of formula (VIIg), R5 is a hydrogen. In still another aspect of formula (VIIg), R is a hydrogen, In still yet another aspect of formula (VIIg), R7 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, formulae (VIIg) do not include the compounds where R1 and R3 are fluorine and R7 is a t-butyl.
[00218] In a further aspect for compounds having formula (VII), X1 is C, X2 is
CR5, X3 is NR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIh). In an additional aspect for compounds having formula (VII), X1 is C, X2 is O, X3 is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIi). In another aspect for compounds having formula (VII), X4s C, X2 is CR5, X3 is O and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (VIIj). These aspects are drawn as
Figure imgf000046_0002
Figure imgf000047_0001
The preferred R groups for these aspects are shown herein for formulae (I) through (Ij). [00219] In general, in yet another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000047_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4 R5, R6, R7, X1, X2, X3 and X4 are as described above for compounds of formulae (II) and (Ha), M and L are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
[00220] In a first embodiment for compounds having formula (VIII), X1 is C, X2 is
N, X3is CR6 and X4 is CR7 and are referred to as formulae (Villa):
Figure imgf000047_0003
[00221] In one aspect of formula (Villa), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (Villa), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (Villa), R6 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. In still yet another aspect of formula (Villa), R7 is an aryl or a substituted aryl. [00222] Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Villa) include those set out in Table 4.
[00223] In general, in still another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (IX):
Figure imgf000048_0001
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R 10, R11, X1 and X2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (III) through formulae (HId), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between N and the metal (M) is dative or absent.
[00224] In a first embodiment for complexes having formula (IX), X1 is C, X2 is
NR5 and are referred to as formulae (IXa):
Figure imgf000048_0002
[00225] In one aspect of formula (IXa), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or a substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (IXa), R3 is a hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl. In still another aspect of formula (IXa), R5 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. [00226] Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IXa) include those set forth in Table 9.
[00227] In a second embodiment for complexes having formula (IX), XJis C and
X2 is S and are referred to as formulae (IXb);
Figure imgf000049_0001
[00228] In one embodiment of formula (IXb), R1 is an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
In another embodiment of formula (IXb), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl.
[00229] Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IXb) include those set forth in Table 11.
[00230] In a third embodiment for complexes having formula (IX), X1 is C and X2 is O and are referred to as formulae (IXc):
Figure imgf000049_0002
[00231] In a fourth embodiment for complexes having formula (IX), X1 is N and
X2 is CR5 and are referred to as formulae (IXd):
Figure imgf000050_0001
[00232] In one aspect of formula (IXd), R1 is an alkyl or substituted alkyl. In another aspect of formula (IXd), R is an alkyl or substituted alkyl.
[00233] Suitable examples of ligands within the scope of formula (IXd) include those set out in Table 13.
[00234] In general, in still another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula :
Figure imgf000050_0002
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, R11, X1 and X2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (IV) and (IVa), M and are as described above, x is 1 or 2 and m" is θ, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
[00235] In a first embodiment for complexes having formula (X), X1 is C and X2 is N and are referred to as formulae (Xa)
Figure imgf000051_0001
[00236] In one aspect of formula (Xa), R1 is an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl or substituted aryl. In another aspect of formula (Xa), R3 is a hydrogen, an alkyl or a substituted alkyl. In yet another aspect of formula (Xa), R9 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or an alkoxy. In still another aspect of formula (Xa), R10 is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, or a substituted alkyl.
[00237] Specific examples of ligands within the scope of formula (Xa) include those set forth in Table 10.
[00238] In general, in still yet another aspect, the invention features metal-ligand complexes characterized by the formula (XI):
Figure imgf000051_0002
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, R11, X1 and X2 are as described above for compounds of formulae (V), M and L are as described above, x is 1, 2, 3, or 4 and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the bond between N and the metal (M) is dative or absent. [00239] The ligands, complexes or catalysts may be supported on organic or inorganic supports. Suitable supports include silicas, aluminas, clays, zeolites, magnesium chloride, polystyrenes, substituted polystyrenes and the like. Polymeric supports may be cross-linked or not. Similarly, the ligands, complexes or catalysts may be supported on supports known to those of skill in the art. See for example, Severn et al. Chem. Rev. 2005, 105, 4073-4147, particularly pages 4115-4117; Hlatky, Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1347-1376 and Fink et al., Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1377-1390, each of which is incorporated herein by reference, including the references cited therein. The compositions, complexes and/or catalysts may be contacted with an activator (described below) before or after contact with the support; alternatively, the support may be contacted with the activator prior to contact with the composition, complex or catalyst. In addition, the catalysts of this invention may be combined with other catalysts in a single reactor and/or employed in a series of reactors (parallel or serial) in order to form blends of polymer products.
[00240] The other aspects, there is also a bis-ligand complex embodiment of this invention. In one aspect, x is 2 in any of formulae (VII), (Vila), (VIIb), (VIIc), (VIId), (VIIe), (VIIf), (VIIg), (VIIh), (VIIi), (VIIj), (VIII), (Villa), (IX), (IXa), (IXb), (IXc), (IXd), (X), (Xa), and/or (XI). The bis-ligand complex embodiments include two equivalents of the same phenol-heterocycle ligand or one equivalent of a first phenol- heterocycle ligand and one equivalent of a second phenol-heterocycle ligand, wherein the first and second phenol-heterocycle ligands are different from each other. In some embodiments of the bis-ligand complex, the first phenol-heterocycle ligand is a ligand in accord with this invention and the second phenol-heterocycle ligand is otherwise known. For example in some embodiments, the second phenol-heterocycle ligand can be a triazole ligand, such as those disclosed in US Patent 6,933,355, incorporated herein by reference. For example, use of a triazole ligand as the second phenol-heterocycle ligand in a bis-ligand complexes in accord with formula (VII) is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000052_0001
where the variables are defined in various embodiments above. [00241] Also for example, a bis-ligand complex can be characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000053_0001
wherein each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms. It is meant that the R groups on any one particular ring do not bridge to the R groups of another ring when forming a fused ring system, which is the meaning of the "on the same ring" language above. [00242] In formula (XX) the heterocyclic rings are different from each other in that the atoms in the ring are different from each other. X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n' or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)n- or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n»> or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; X5 is N or C, X6 is O, S, N(R5)n- or CR5, X7 is O, S, N(R6)n- or CR6, X8 is O, S, N(R7)n>" or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1 provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic. To make the atoms in the ring different from each other, it is further provided that the atoms in the X1, X2, X3/X4, N ring are different from the atoms in the X5, X6, X7, X8, N ring in the selection of the C, N, O or S atom, such that at least, either X1 and X5 are different or X2 and X6 are different or X3 and X7 are different or X4 and X8 are different. Of course more than these particular X groups might be different from each other. Certain embodiments include, triazoles, where combinations of X5, X6; X5, X7; or X5, X8 are both N (meaning that the atom in the ring is N, but the R groups are as specified herein);
2-benzotriazoles, where X and X are both N; X , X are carbon atoms of benzo-ring fused to triazole; 1-benzotriazoles, X5and X8 are both N, X6, X7 are carbon atoms of benzo-ring fused to triazole); and tetrazoles, where X5 is N, and 2 of X6; X7; or X8 are N. [00243] Also in conjunction with formula (XX), M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; m" is 0, 1, 2, or 3; and the bond between the heteroaromatic nitrogens (N) and the metal (M) is dative or absent. [00244] Within formula (XX), more specific embodiments of the bis-ligand complexes can be characterized by a general formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000054_0001
Figure imgf000055_0001
[00245] Within each of formulae (XXa-g) the variables are as defined herein.
[00246] The metal-ligand complexes and compositions described herein are active catalysts typically in combination with a suitable activator, combination of activators, activating technique or activating technique, although some of the ligand-metal complexes may be active without an activator or activating technique depending on the ligand-metal complex and on the process being catalyzed. Broadly, the activator(s) may comprise alumoxanes, Lewis acids, Bronsted acids, compatible non-interfering activators and combinations of the foregoing. These types of activators have been taught for use with different compositions or metal complexes in the following references, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety: U.S. Patents 5,599,761, 5,616,664, 5,453,410, 5,153,157, 5,064,802, EP-A-277,004 and Marks et aL, Chern. Rev. 2000, 100, 1391-1434. hi some embodiments, ionic or ion forming activators are preferred. In other embodiments, alumoxane activators are preferred.
[00247] Suitable ion forming compounds useful as an activator in one embodiment comprise a cation that is a Bronsted acid capable of donating a proton, and an inert, compatible, non-interfering, anion, A". Suitable anions include, but are not limited to, those containing a single coordination complex comprising a charge-bearing metal or metalloid core. Mechanistically, the anion should be sufficiently labile to be displaced by olefmic, diolefinic and unsaturated compounds or other neutral Lewis bases such as ethers or nitriles. Suitable metals include, but are not limited to, aluminum, gold and platinum. Suitable metalloids include, but are not limited to, boron, phosphorus, and silicon. Compounds containing anions that comprise coordination complexes containing a single metal or metalloid atom are well known and many, particularly such compounds containing a single boron atom in the anion portion, are available commercially. [00248] Specifically, such activators may be represented by the following general formula: (L*— H)d +(Ad-) wherein L* is a neutral Lewis base; (L* — H)+ is a Bronsted acid; Ad" is a non-interfering, compatible anion having a charge of d-, and d is an integer from 1 to 3. More specifically Ad" corresponds to the formula: (M'3+ Qh)d~ wherein h is an integer from 4 to 6; h-3 = d; M' is an element selected from group 13 of the periodic table; and Q is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, dialkylamido, halogen, alkoxy, aryloxy, hydrocarbyl, and substituted-hydrocarbyl radicals (including halogen substituted hydrocarbyl, such as perhalogenated hydrocarbyl radicals), said Q having up to 20 carbons. In a more specific embodiment, d is one, i.e., the counter ion has a single negative charge and corresponds to the formula A'.
[00249] Activators comprising boron or aluminum can be represented by the following general formula:
(L*— H)+ (M55Q4)- wherein: L* is as previously defined; M55 is boron or aluminum; and Q is a fluorinated C1-20 hydrocarbyl group. Most specifically, Q is independently selected from the group consisting of fluorinated aryl group, such as a pentafluorophenyl group (i.e., a C6F5 group) or a 3,5-bis(CF3)2C6H3 group. Illustrative, but not limiting, examples of boron compounds which may be used as an activating cocatalyst in the preparation of the improved catalysts of this invention are tri-substituted ammonium salts such as: trimethylammonium tetraphenylborate, triethylammoniuni tetraphenylborate, tripropylammonium tetraphenylborate, tri(n-butyl)ammonium tetraphenylborate, tri(t- butyl)ammonium tetraphenylborate, N,N-dimethylanilinium tetraphenylborate, N,N- diethylanilinium tetraphenylborate, N,N-dimethylanilinium tetra-(3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, N,N-dimethyl-(2,4,6-trimethylanilinium) tetraphenylborate, trimetkylammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, trietliylammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, tripropylammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, tri(n-butyl)ammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, tri(secbutyl)ammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, N9N- dimethylanilinium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, N,N-diethylanilinium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, N,N-dimethyl-(2,4,6-trimethylanilinium) tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, trimethylammonium tetrakis-(2,3,4,6- tetrafluorophenylborate and N,N-dimethylanilinium tetrakis-(2,3,4,6-tetrafluorophenyl) borate; dialkyl ammonium salts such as: di-(i-propyl)ammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, and dicyclohexylammonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate; and tri-substituted phosphonium salts such as: triphenylphospnonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, tri(o-tolyl)phosphonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, and tri(2,6-dimethylphenyl)phosphonium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate; N,N-dimethylanilinium tetrakis(3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)ρhenyl)borate; HNMe(C18H37)2 +B(C6F5)4-;
HNPh(C18H37)2 +B(C6F5)4- and ((4-nBu-Ph)NH(n-hexyl)2)+B(C6F5)4- and ((4-nBu- Ph)NH(n-decyl)2)+B(C6F5)4-. Specific (L*— H)+ cations are N,N-dialkylanilinium cations, such as HNMe2Ph+, substituted N,N-dialkylanilinium cations, such as (4-nBu- C6H4)NH(n-C6H13)2 + and (4-nBu-C6H4)NH(n-C10H21)2 + and HNMe(C18H37)2 +. Specific examples of anions are tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate and tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate. In some embodiments, the specific activator is PhNMe2H+B(C6F5)4-.
[00250] Other suitable ion forming activators comprise a salt of a cationic oxidizing agent and a non-interfering, compatible anion represented by the formula:
(Oxe+)d (Ad-)e wherein: Oxe+ is a cationic oxidizing agent having a charge of e+; e is an integer from 1 to 3; and Ad~, and d are as previously defined. Examples of cationic oxidizing agents include: ferrocenium, hydrocarbyl-substituted ferrocenium, Ag+, or Pb+2. Specific embodiments of Ad" are those anions previously defined with respect to the Bronsted acid containing activating cocatalysts, especially tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate. [00251] Another suitable ion forming, activating cocatalyst comprises a compound that is a salt of a carbenium ion or silyl cation and a non-interfering, compatible anion represented by the formula: ©+A- wherein: ©+ is a C1-1O0 carbenium ion or silyl cation; and A- is as previously defined. A preferred carbenium ion is the trityl cation, i.e. triphenylcarbenium. The silyl cation may be characterized by the formula Z4Z5Z6Si+ cation, where each of Z4, Z5, and Z6 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxyl, aryloxyl, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, a specified activator is Ph3C+B(C6F5)4-.
[00252] Other suitable activating cocatalysts comprise a compound that is a salt, which is represented by the formula (A*+a)b(Z*J*j)"C d wherein A* is a cation of charge +a; Z* is an anion group of from 1 to 50, specifically 1 to 30 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, further containing two or more Lewis base sites; J* independently each occurrence is a Lewis acid coordinated to at least one Lewis base site of Z*, and optionally two or more such J* groups may be joined together in a moiety having multiple Lewis acidic functionality; j is a number form 2 to 12; and a, b, c, and d are integers from 1 to 3, with the proviso that a x b is equal to c x d. See WO 99/42467, which is incorporated herein by reference, In other embodiments, the anion portion of these activating cocatalysts may be characterized by the formula ((C6F5)3M""-LN-M""(C6F5)3)" where M"" is boron or aluminum and LN is a linking group, which is specifically selected from the group consisting of cyanide, azide, dicyanamide and imidazolide. The cation portion is specifically a quaternary amine. See, e.g., LaPointe, et ah, J. Am. Chan. Soc. 2000, 122, 9560-9561, which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00253] In addition, suitable activators include Lewis acids, such as those selected from the group consisting of tris(aryl)boranes, tris(substituted aryl)boranes, tris(aryl)alanes, tris(substituted aryl)alanes, including activators such as tris(pentafluorophenyl)borane. Other useful ion forming Lewis acids include those having two or more Lewis acidic sites, such as those described in WO 99/06413 or Piers, et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1999, 121, 3244-3245, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other useful Lewis acids will be evident to those of skill in the art. In general, the group of Lewis acid activators is within the group of ion forming activators (although1 exceptions to this general rule can be found) and the group tends to exclude the group 13 reagents listed below. Combinations of ion forming activators maybe used. [00254] Other general activators or compounds useful in a polymerization reaction may be used. These compounds may be activators in some contexts, but may also serve other functions in the polymerization system, such as alkylating a metal center or scavenging impurities. These compounds are within the general definition of "activator," but are not considered herein to be ion-forming activators. These compounds include a group 13 reagent that may be characterized by the formula G13R5V pDp where G13 is selected from the group consisting of B, Al, Ga, In and combinations thereof, p is 0, 1 or 2, each R50 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and combinations thereof, and each D is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydrogen, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, mercapto, alkylthio, arylthio, phosphino and combinations thereof. In other embodiments, the group 13 activator is an oligomeric or polymeric alumoxane compound, such as methylalumoxane and the known modifications thereof. See, for example, Barron, "Alkylalumoxanes, Synthesis, Structure and Reactivity", pp. 33-67 in Metallocene-Based Polyolefins: Preparation, Properties and Technology, J. Schiers and W. Kaminsky (eds.), Wiley Series in Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Chichester, England, 2000, and references cited therein. In other embodiments, a divalent metal reagent may be used that is defined by the general formula M'R50 2-P'DP' and p' is 0 or 1 in this embodiment and R50 and D are as defined above. M' is the metal and is selected from the group consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Zn, Cd and combinations thereof. In still other embodiments, an alkali metal reagent may be used that is defined by the general formula M"'R50 and in this embodiment R50 is as defined above. M'v is the alkali metal and is selected from the group consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and combinations thereof. Additionally, hydrogen and/or silanes may be used in the catalytic composition or added to the polymerization system. Silanes may be characterized by the formula SiR5VqDq where R50 is defined as above, q is 1, 2, 3 or 4 and D is as defined above, with the proviso that there is at least one D that is a hydrogen.
[00255] The molar ratio of metal: activator (whether a composition or complex is employed as a catalyst) employed specifically ranges from 1:10,000 to 100:1, more specifically from 1:5000 to 10:1, most specifically from 1:10 to 1:1. In one embodiment of the invention mixtures of the above compounds are used, particularly a combination of a group 13 reagent and an ion-forming activator. The molar ratio of group 13 reagent to ion-forming activator is specifically from 1:10,000 to 1000:1, more specifically from 1:5000 to 100:1, most specifically from 1:100 to 10:1. In another embodiment, the ion forming activators are combined with a group 13 reagent. Another embodiment is a combination of the above compounds having about 1 equivalent of an optionally substituted N,N-dialkylanilinium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl) borate, and 5-30 equivalents of a group 13 reagent. In some embodiments from about 30 to 2000 equivalents of an oligomeric or polymeric alumoxane activator, such as a modified alumoxane (e.g., alkylalumoxane), can be used.
[00256] In some embodiments, the ligand or bis-ligand combination will be mixed with a suitable metal precursor compound prior to or simultaneous with allowing the mixture to be contacted to the reactants. When the ligand is mixed with the metal precursor compound, a metal-ligand complex may be formed, which may be a catalyst. Also, the ligand or ligand composition can be combined with an activated metal precursor, as described herein. In other aspects, the catalysts of the invention may be combeined withother catalysts to make bi-modal polymer products; and here the catalysts may be combined together in solution and/or on a solid support. [00257] The ligands, compositions, complexes and/or catalysts of the invention can be used to catalyze a variety of transformations, including, for example, oxidation, reduction, hydrogenation, hydrosilylation, hydrocyanation, hydroformylation, polymerization, carbonylation, isomerization, metathesis, carbon-hydrogen activation, carbon-halogen activation, cross-coupling, Friedel-Crafts acylation and alkylation, hydration, Diels-Alder reactions, Baeyer-Villiger reactions, and other transformations. Some compositions, complexes and/or catalysts according to the invention are particularly effective at polymerizing ethylene or α-olefins (such as propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene, 1-hexene, 1-heptene, 1-octene, 1-decene and styrene), copolymerizing ethylene with α-olefins (such as propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene, 1-hexene, 1-heptene, 1-octene, and styrene), copolymerizing ethylene with 1,1-disubstituted olefins (such as isobutylene), or copolymerizing ethylene, propylene and a diene monomer suitable for production of EPDM (Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Monomer) synthetic rubbers. Thus, for example, in some embodiments, metal-ligand compositions and complexes containing zirconium or hafnium may be useful in the polymerization of propylene to form isotactic polypropylene or in the copolymerization of ethylene and one or more α-olefins, as noted above. In other embodiments, vanadium and chromium compositions and/or complexes according to the invention may be useful in, for example, the polymerization of ethylene. The compositions, complexes and/or catalysts according to the invention may also polymerize monomers that have polar functionalities in homopolymerizations or copolymerizations and/or homopolymerize 1,1- and 1,2-disubstituted olefins. Also, diolefins in combination with ethylene and/or α-olefins or 1,1- and 1,2-disubstituted olefins may be copolymerized. In some embodiments, catalysts incorporating the ligands, compositions and/or complexes of the present invention exhibit high catalytic activity in the polymerization of such α-olefins, including at high temperatures. [00258] In general monomers useful herein may be olefinically unsaturated monomers having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms either alone or in combination. Generally, monomers may include olefins (including cyclic olefins), diolefins and unsaturated monomers including ethylene and C3 to C20 α-olefins such as propylene, 1-butene, 1- hexene, 1-octene, 4-methyl-l-pentene, 1-norbornene, styrene and mixtures thereof; additionally, 1,1-disubstituted olefins, such as isobutylene, 2-methyl- 1-butene, 2-methyl- 1-pentene, 2-ethyl-l-pentene, 2-methyl- 1-hexene, 3-trimethylsilyl-2-methyl-l-propene,α- methyl-styrene, either alone or with other monomers such as ethylene or C3 to C20 α- oleiϊns and/or diolefins; additionally 1,2-substituted olefins, such as 2-butene. The α- olefins listed above may be polymerized in a stereospecific manner - for example, as in the generation of isotactic or syndiotactic or hemiisotactic polypropylene. Additionally the α-olefins may be polymerized to produce a polymer with differing tacticity sequences within the polymer chain, such as polypropylene containing atactic and isotactic sequences within the same polymer chain. Diolefins generally comprise 1,3-dienes such as (butadiene), substituted 1,3-dienes (such as isoprene) and other substituted 1,3-dienes, with the term substituted referring to the same types of substituents referred to above in the definition section. Diolefins also comprise 1,5-dienes and other non-conjugated dienes, such as ethylidene-norbornene, 1,4-hexadiene, dicyclopentadiene and other dienes used in the manufacture of EPDM synthetic rubbers. The styrene monomers may be unsubstirαted or substituted at one or more positions on the aryl ring. The use of diolefins in this invention is typically in conjunction with another monomer that is not a diolefin. In some embodiments, acetylenically unsaturated monomers may be employed. [00259] More specifically, the catalysts of the present invention are active for certain monomers, particularly ethylene and/or styfene. Thus, the catalysts of the present invention may provide lower comonomer incorporation in the presence of a comonomer, making these catalysts particularly useful for certain polymerization reactions where low co-monomer incorporation is desired. Also particular catalysts of the present invention co-polymerize ethylene and styrene (or substituted styrenes), forming ethylene-styrene copolymers. Also the catalysts of this invention are useful to polymerize a vinylidene aromatic monomer in a solution polymerization process conducted at a temperature greater than or equal to 100°C.
[00260] Polymers that can be prepared according to the present invention include ethylene copolymers with at least one C3-C20 α-olefin, particularly propylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 4-methyl-l-pentene and 1-octene. The copolymers of ethylene with at least one C3-C20 α-olefin comprise from about 0.1 mol.% α-olefin to about 50 mol.% α-olefin, more specifically from about 0.2 mol.% α-olefin to about 50 mol.% α-olefin and still more specifically from about 2 mol.% α-olefm to about 30 mol.% higher olefin. For certain embodiments of this invention, product copolymers may include those of ethylene and a comonomer selected from the group consisting of propylene, 1-butene, 1- hexene, and 1-octene comprise from about 0.2 to about 30 mol.% comonomer, more specifically from about 1 to about 20 mol. % comonomer. In particular, in some embodiments ethylene copolymers with at least one C3-C20 α-olefin can be produced having a high molecular weight (e.g., greater than about 50,000, more specifically greater than about 150,000) in a solution process at a temperature of greater than about 100 °C, more specifically greater than about 130 °C. In certain embodiments, ethylene copolymers with at least one C3-C20 α-olefin can be produced with a low molecular weight (e.g., less than about 50,000, more specifically, less than about 40,000, and even more specifically less than about 30,000).
[00261] The ligands, compositions, complexes, and/or catalysts of the invention may also be used to catalyze other (i.e., non-polymerization) transformations. Examples of asymmetric or enantioselective reactions catalyzed by chiral Group 4 catalysts include olefin hydrogenation, olefin epoxidation, olefin isomerization, olefin-pyridine coupling, imine hydrogenation, aldol reactions, imino aldol reactions, epoxidation of allylic alcohols, alkylation of aldehydes, alkylation of imines, Diels-Alder reactions, Baeyer- Villiger reactions, hydroamination/cyclization of amino-alkenes, pinacol coupling of aldehydes, and hydrosilation of imines, ketones, and olefins. In some embodiments, the complexes and catalysts of the invention may be chiral. For example, in some instances, substantially diastereomerically pure or substantially enantiomerically pure complexes may be useful for stereoselective, asymmetric, enantioselective, or diastereoselective reactions or transformations. Thus, in some embodiments substantially enantiomerically- or diastereomerically-pure complexes, ligand-metal compositions, and catalysts according to the invention may be used as asymmetric catalysts for a range of reactions, including polymerization reactions and other (non-polymerization) reactions, including many reactions useful in organic synthesis, In some embodiments, catalysts incorporating the compositions and complexes of the invention may be used to catalyze the asymmetric production of reaction products with enantiomeric excess (ee) or diastereomeric excess (de) of greater than 90% or greater than 99%. The asymmetric synthesis of chiral organic molecules is an important field, and is critical in the synthesis of many pharmaceuticals and other products. Single enantiomers of a chiral product can be prepared by a variety of techniques, including the resolution of racemates, or the use of substantially enantiomerically pure starting materials from the chiral pool of natural products, but for large scale synthesis the use of enantioselective catalysis is often the most attractive, and most economical, choice. See, e.g., Blaser et ah, "Enantioselective Synthesis", pp. 1131-1149, in Applied Homogeneous Catalysis with Organometallic Compounds, Vol. 3, Cornils, B., & Herrmann, W. (eds.), 2nd Edition, Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, Germany, 2002, and Catalytic Asymmetric Synthesis, Ojima (ed.), VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1993, and the references cited therein. [00262] In some embodiments, novel products, such as polymers, copolymers or interpolymers, may be formed having unique physical and/or melt flow properties. Such novel polymers can be employed alone or with other polymers in a blend to form products that may be molded, cast, extruded or spun. End uses for the polymers made with the catalysts of this invention include films for packaging, trash bags, bottles, containers, foams, coatings, insulating devices and household items. Also, such functionalized polymers are useful as solid supports for organometallic or chemical synthesis processes.
[00263] The α-olefms listed above may be polymerized in a stereoselective manner to produce a substantially stereoregular polymer product (that is, a polymer product that is detectably enriched in m or r dyads (as determined, e.g., by 13C NMR) as compared to a corresponding atactic material), as in the generation of isotactic, syndiotactic or hemϋsotactic poly-α-olefins. For example, in some embodiments 1- butene may be polymerized into isotactic poly-1-butene. Additionally, the α-olefins may be polymerized to produce a polymer with differing tacticity sequences within the polymer chain, such as polypropylene containing atactic and isotactic sequences within the same polymer chain. The stereoregularity may be interrupted by stereoerrors, in particular isolated stereoerrors, which is an indication of enantiomorphic side control. Also, in some embodiments the isotactic polypropylene may include regioerrors as described in the literature (see, e.g., Resconi et al., Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1253-1345). [00264] More specifically, it has been found that particular catalysts of the present invention polymerize propylene to isotactic or crystalline polypropylene, forming polymers with novel properties. In particular, in some embodiments isotactic polypropylene can be produced having a narrow polydispersity (e.g., less than about 3.0 and more specifically less than 2.5) combined with a high molecular weight (e.g., greater than about 50,000, more specifically greater than about 100,000, even more specifically greater than about 150,000, and even more specifically greater than about 500,000) in a solution polymerization process at a temperature of greater than about 100°C. In certain embodiments, isotactic polypropylene can be produced with a low molecular weight (e.g., less than about 30,000, more specifically less than about 15,000, and even more specifically less than about 5,000). In some embodiments, broader polydispersities can be obtained for the isotactic polypropylene or other polymers (e.g., copolymers of ethylene and α-olefins as discussed in more detail below) produced according to the invention.
[00265] The polymerization conditions are described herein, producing isotactic polypropylene with a crystallinity index of between about 0.35 and about 0.95, more specifically between about 0.65 and 0.95. The crystallinity index is determined using FTIR as is known to those of skill in the art and calibrated based on a relative scale. In one embodiment, the crystallinity index value can be determined using commercially available FTIR equipment (such as a Bruker Equinox 55 with an IR Scope II in reflection mode using Pike MappIR software). The crystallinity index is obtained from the ratio of band heights at 995 cm"1 and 972 cm'1. Atactic polypropylene has a ratio of band heights or crystallinity index of 0.2.' Greater than 98% isotactic polypropylene has a crystallinity index ratio of greater than 0.95. Generally, the amount of error in crystallinity index measurements is ±0.05. Polymer blends of various compositions show a linear relationship between % isotacticity and crystallinity index. See, for example, J. P. Luongo, J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 1960, 3, 302-309 and T. Sundell, et al, Polymer 1996, 37, 3227-3231, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00266] As those of skill in the art will recognize, isotacticity can also be represented by percent pentads (%mmmm) as determined by 13C NMR spectroscopy. Proton decoupled 13C NMR spectroscopy can be performed using commercially available equipment (such as a Bruker 300 MHz at 100°C probe temperature) to determine the degree of tacticity as %mmmm pentads (for assignment of 13C signals see the review H.H. Brintzinger et al., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Eng. 1995, 34, 1143, which is incorporated herein by reference; and Resconi, Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 1253-1345 and Gibson et al., Chem Rev. 2003, 103, 283-315). For example, a 15-30 mg polymer sample is dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of C2D2Cl4 and C2Cl4 by heating the sample to ca. 100°C. The %mmmm is determined by the ratio of peak integral from 23.5 to 21.5 ppm and peak integral 23.5 to 19 ppm (in the absence of significant chain end regio- irregularity signals in this region). Proton decoupled C NMR spectroscopy can be also performed to determine the frequency of and nature of stereoerrors and regioerrors. [00267] In addition, the melting point of the crystalline polypropylene is generally in the range of from about 115°C to about 165°C, more specifically between about 120°C and 155°C, and in some embodiments specifically above about 15O°C. Melting points are determined by differential scanning calorimetry, as is known in the art (see also the example section, herein).
[00268] The FTIR method used for determining mol % total styrene in product is as described in US Patent No. 6,794,514, the contents of which are incorporated herein in their entirety. FTIR was performed on a Bruker Equinox 55+IR Scope II in reflection mode using a Pike MappIR accessory with 16 scans. The ratio of total styrene to ethylene was obtained from the ratio of band heights at 4330 cm-1 and 1602 cm-1. This method was calibrated using a set of ethylene-styrene copolymers with a range of known styrene content.
[00269] The total styrene content of the polymer products (mol % total styrene), includes both the styrene incorporated in the ethylene-styrene copolymer and any background homopolystyrene (PS) in the product sample. Tacticity determination for polystyrene samples are determined using C NMR. High temperature NMR spectra are recorded on a Bruker 300 MHz spectrometer. 13C chemical shifts (75.47 MHz) are referenced relative to tetrachloro-ethane-d2 solvent peaks. Polymer sample concentrations are 100-200 mg/ml. Acquisition parameters are 8196-16392 scans; 30° pulse width; acquisition time = 1 second; dl = 3 seconds; 70-90°C probe temperature. Tacticity of styrene polymers is determined using the 144-147 ppm region of the 13C NMR spectrum (phenyl C(I)), see NMR and Macromolecules, Randall Ed., Harwood et g[. Ch. 13: Polystyrene and Epimerized Isotactic Polystyrenes (1983). [00270] The ratio of 1-octene to ethylene incorporated in the ethylene-octene copolymer products was determined by FTIR. FTIR was performed on a Bruker Equinox 55 +IR Scope II in reflection mode using a Pike MappIR accessory with 16 scans. The ratio of 1-octene to ethylene incorporation was represented as the weight % (wt. %) of 1- octene incorporated in the polymer (wt. % 1-octene). Wt. % 1-octene was obtained from ratio of band heights at 1378 cm-1 and 4335 cm-1. This method was calibrated using a set of ethylene/1 -octene copolymers with a range of known wt. % 1-octene content. [00271] Novel polymers, copolymers or interpolymers may be formed having unique physical and/or melt flow properties. Polymers that can be prepared according to the present invention include copolymers of ethylene and one or more α-olefins, such as copolymers of ethylene with at least one C4-C20 α-olefm, such as 1-butene, 1-hexene, 4- methyl-1-pentene, 1-octene or styrene. Similarly, the techniques described herein can be used to prepare propylene copolymers with at least one C4-C20 α-olefϊn. In some embodiments, the copolymers of ethylene or propylene with at least one C4-C20 α-olefm comprise from about 0.01 mol.% higher olefin to about 50 mol.% higher olefin, more specifically from about 0.1 mol.% higher olefin to about 50 mol.% higher olefin and still more specifically from about 1 mol.% higher olefin to about 30 mol.% higher olefin. For certain embodiments of this invention, crystalline copolymers include those of ethylene or propylene and a comonomer selected from the group consisting of ethylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 1-octene and styrene comprise from about 0.1 to about 50 mol.% comonomer, more specifically from about 1 to about 20 mol. % comonomer, even more specifically from about 2 to about 15 mol. % comonomer and most specifically from about 5 to about 12 mol. % comonomer.
[00272] The novel polymers disclosed herein can be employed alone or with other natural or synthetic polymers in a blend. Such other natural or synthetic polymers can be polyethylene (including linear low density polyethylene, low density polyethylene, high density polyethylene, etc.), atactic polypropylene, nylon, EPDM, ethylene-propylene elastomer copolymers, polystyrene (including syndiotactic polystyrene), ethylene-styrene copolymers and terpolymers of ethylene-styrene and other C3-C20 olefins (such as propylene).
[00273] Polymerization is carried out under polymerization conditions, including temperatures of from -100°C to 300°C and pressures from atmospheric to 3000 atmospheres. Suspension, solution, slurry, gas phase or high-pressure polymerization processes may be employed with the catalysts and compounds of this invention. Such processes can be run in a batch, semi-batch or continuous mode. Examples of such processes are well known in the art. A support for the catalyst may be employed, which may be inorganic (such as alumina, magnesium chloride or silica) or organic (such as a polymer or cross-linked polymer). Methods for the preparation of supported catalysts are known in the art. Slurry, suspension, gas phase and high-pressure processes as known to those skilled in the art may also be used with supported catalysts of the invention.
[00274] Other additives that are useful in a polymerization reaction may be employed, such as scavengers, promoters, modifiers and/or chain transfer agents, such as hydrogen, aluminum alkyls and/or silanes.
[00275] As discussed herein, catalytic performance can be determined a number of different ways, as those of skill in the art will appreciate. Catalytic performance can be determined by the yield of polymer obtained per mole of metal complex, which in some contexts may be considered to be activity. The examples provide data for these comparisons.
[00276] As stated herein, a solution process is specified for certain benefits, with the solution process being run at a temperature above 90°C, more specifically at a temperature above 100°C, further more specifically at a temperature above HO°C and even further more specifically at a temperature above 13O°C. Suitable solvents for polymerization are non-coordinating, inert liquids. Examples include straight and branched-chain hydrocarbons such as isobutane, butane, pentane, isopentane, hexane, isohexane, heptane, octane, Isopar-E® and mixtures thereof; cyclic and alicyclic hydrocarbons such as cyclohexane, cycloheptane, methylcyclohexane, methylcycloheptane, and mixtures thereof; perhalogenated hydrocarbons such as perfluorinated C4-10 alkanes, chlorobenzene, and aromatic and alkyl substituted aromatic compounds such as benzene, toluene, mesitylene, and xylene. Suitable solvents also include liquid olefins which may act as monomers or comonomers including ethylene, propylene, 1-butene, butadiene, cyclopentene, 1-hexene, 1-pentene, 3 -methyl- 1-pentene, 4-methyl-l-pentene, 1,4-hexadiene, 1-octene, 1-decene, isobutylene, styrene, divinylbenzene, allylbenzene, and vinyltoluene (including all isomers alone or in admixture). Mixtures of the foregoing are also suitable.
[00277] In some embodiments, a solution process is specified for crystalline polypropylene production. The solution process to prepare isotactic polypropylene comprises adding a catalyst and propylene monomer to a reactor and subjecting the contents to polymerization conditions.
[00278] The ligands, metal-ligand complexes and compositions of this invention can be prepared and tested for catalytic activity in one or more of the above reactions in a combinatorial fashion. Combinatorial chemistry generally involves the parallel or rapid serial synthesis and/or screening or characterization of compounds and compositions of matter. U.S. Patent Nos. 5,985,356, 6,030,917 and WO 98/03521, all of which are incorporated herein by reference, generally disclose combinatorial methods. In this regard, the ligands, metal-ligand complexes or compositions may be prepared and/or tested in rapid serial and/or parallel fashion, e.g., in an array format. When prepared in an array format, ligands, metal-ligand complexes or compositions may take the form of an array comprising a plurality of compounds wherein each compound can be characterized by any of the above general formulas {i.e., I, II, III, etc.). An array of ligands may be synthesized using the procedures outlined previously. The array may also be of metal precursor compounds, the metal-ligand complexes or compositions characterized by the previously described formulae and/or description. Typically, each member of the array will have differences so that, for example, a ligand or activator or metal precursor or R group in a first region of the array may be different than the ligand or activator or metal precursor or R group in a second region of the array. Other variables may also differ from region to region in the array.
[00279] In such a combinatorial array, typically each of the plurality of compositions or complexes has a different composition or stoichiometry, and typically each composition or complex is at a selected region on a substrate such that each compound is isolated from the other compositions or complexes. This isolation, can take many forms, typically depending on the substrate used. If a flat substrate is used, there may simply be sufficient space between regions so that there cannot be interdiffusion between compositions or complexes. As another example, the substrate can be a microtiter or similar plate having wells so that each composition or complex is in a region separated from other compounds in other regions by a physical barrier. The array may also comprise a parallel reactor or testing chamber.
[00280] The array typically comprises at least 8 compounds, complexes or compositions each having a different chemical formula, meaning that there must be at least one different atom or bond differentiating the members in the array or different ratios of the components referred to herein (with components referring to ligands, metal precursors, activators, group 13 reagents, solvents, monomers, supports, etc.). In other embodiments, there are at least 20 compounds, complexes or compositions on or in the substrate each having a different chemical formula. In still other embodiments, there are at least 40 or 90 or 124 compounds, complexes or compositions on or in the substrate each having a different chemical formula. Because of the manner of forming combinatorial arrays, it may be that each compound, complex or composition may not be worked-up, purified or isolated, and for example, may contain reaction by-products or impurities or unreacted starting materials.
[00281] The catalytic performance of the compounds, complexes or compositions of this invention can be tested in a combinatorial or high throughput fashion. Polymerizations can also be performed in a combinatorial fashion, see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 6,306,658, 6,508,984 and WO 01/98371, each of which is herein incorporated by reference.
EXAMPLES
[00282] All air sensitive reactions were performed under a purified argon or nitrogen atmosphere in a Vacuum Atmospheres or MBraun glove box. All solvents used were anhydrous, de-oxygenated and purified according to known techniques. All ligands and metal precursors were prepared according to procedures known to those of skill in the art, e.g., under inert atmosphere conditions, etc. Unless otherwise indicated, polymerizations were generally carried out in a parallel pressure reactor, which is described in U.S. Patents 6,306,658, 6,455,316 and 6,489,168, and WO 00/09255, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. The above-described analytical techniques were utilized, generally. [00283] Section 1. Ligand Synthesis
[00284] Building blocks used for the synthesis of ligands A1-A35, B1-B6, Cl-
C27, D1-D3, E2-E24, F1-F12, and G1-G4, are listed in the Building Block Table. Building block BBl was purchased from Lancaster. Building blocks BB5 and BB7 were purchased from Aldrich. All other building blocks listed in Building Block Table were prepared by Syngene. Aryloximes and arylhyroximidoyl chlorides used for the synthesis of ligands A1-A35 were either available commercially or prepared using techniques known to those of skill in the art (see Liu, et al, J. Org. Chem. 1980, 45, 3916-3918). All boronic acids used were commercially available with the exception of 9- anthracenylboronic acid that was prepared as described in Scheme Dl. 2,4- Dibromothiazole was purchased from Frontier Scientific. All benzils used for the synthesis of ligands E2-E16 were available commercially. Phenol protecting groups, methoxymethyl ether and methyl ether, were introduced using standard procedures known to those of skill in the art.
Figure imgf000070_0001
Building Block Table [00285] Section IA. 3-Aryl Phenol Oxadiazole Ligands
Figure imgf000071_0001
Scheme Al
[00286] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with BBlO (46 mg, 0.20 mmol), benzaldehyde oxime (0.066 rnL, 0.60 mmol), cyclohexane (4.0 mL), 2,6-lutidine (0.07 mL, 0.60 mmol), and N-chlorosuccinimide (80 mg, 0.60 mmol). The reaction was heated at 8O°C for 18h. The crude reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / CH2Cl2 = 5 / 1. Isolated 64 mg, 91% yield, of ligand Al as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.24 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.64 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 7.05-7.11 (m, 3H), 7.68 (d, 1H), 7.91 (d, 1H), 7.99 (m, 2H), 11.24 (s, 1H, OH). [00287] Ligands A12, A14-A19, A21, and A23-A29 were synthesized according to the above procedure in yields ranging from 45-82% with the exception of ligand A29 which was isolated in 26% yield.
[00288] Ligand A22 was synthesized using a slightly modified procedure to that described above for ligand Al. A mixture of the oxime (0.90 mmol), cyclohexane (3.0 mL), and iV-chlorosuccinimide (0.90 mmol) was first heated to 8O°C for Ih. After cooling to rt, a solution of BBIl (0.30 mmol) and 2,6-lutidine (0.90 mmol) in cyclohexane (3.0 mL) was added. The reaction was heated back to 8O°C for 18h. Ligand A22 was isolated in 58% yield.
[00289] Ligand A35 was synthesized as described for ligand Al except an aqueous workup was done prior to chromatography. Cyclohexane was removed by rotary evaporation and the crude reaction mixture was taken up in Et2O. The Et2O solution was washed twice with H2O, once with brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Ligand A35 was isolated in 79% yield.
Figure imgf000072_0001
Scheme A2
[00290] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with BBlO (46 mg, 0.20 mmol),
2-methyl-iV-hydroxybenzenecarboximidoyl chloride (51 mg, 0.30 mmol), toluene (2.0 HiL), and 1Pr2NEt (0.052 mL, 0.30 mmol). The reaction was heated at 6O°C for 24h. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / CH2Cl2 = 10 / 1. Isolated 59 mg, 81% yield, of ligand A2 as a faint yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.25 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.63 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 2.59 (s, 3H, CH3), 7.00- 7.12 (m, 3H), 7.68 (d, 1H), 7.92 (m, 2H), 11.29 (s, 1H, OH).
[00291] Ligands A3-A9 were synthesized as described above for ligand A2 in yields ranging from 49-84%.
Figure imgf000072_0002
Scheme A3
[00292] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with BBIl (239 mg, 0.95 mmol),
2,6-dichloro-iV-hydroxybenzenecarboximidoyl chloride (642 mg, 2.86 mmol), cyclohexane (19 mL), and 2,6-lutidine (0.33 mL, 2.86 mmol). The reaction was heated at 8O°C for 2Oh. The crude reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 20 / 1. Isolated 373 mg, 89% yield, of ligand A13 as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.18 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 6.40 (dd, 1H), 6.77 (d, 2H), 7.18-7.21 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.58 (d, 1H), 7.69-7.72 (m, 2H), 7.90 (d, 1H), 10.75 (s, 1H, OH). [00293] Ligands A20, and A30-A32 were synthesized as described above for ligand A13. Ligand A20 was isolated in 91% yield, ligand A30 in 87% yield, ligand
A31 in 77% yield, and ligand A32 in 47% yield.
[00294] Ligands AlO and All were synthesized as described for ligand A13 except the reaction temperature was 6O°C instead of 8O°C. Ligand AlO was isolated in
93% yield, and ligand All in 81% yield.
[00295] Ligands A33 and A34 were synthesized as described for ligand A13 except an aqueous workup was done prior to chromatography. Cyclohexane was removed by rotary evaporation and the crude reaction mixture was taken up in CH2Cl2.
The CH2Cl2 solution was washed twice with H2O, once with brine, and then dried over
Na2SO4. Ligand A33 was isolated in 44% yield and ligand A34 in 62%yield.
[00296] Section IB. 5-Aryl Phenol Oxadiazole Ligands
Figure imgf000073_0001
Scheme Bl
[00297] A reaction flask was charged with BB7 (1.0 g, 4.23 mmol), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (356 mg, 5.12 mmol), EtOH (8.0 mL), and pyridine (0.41 mL, 5.12 mmol). The reaction was heated at 8O°C for 2h. Ethanol was removed by rotary evaporation and the reaction mixture was taken up in Et2O / H2O. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Isolated 1.04 g, 98% yield, of 3,5-di-t-butyl-2-hydroxybenzaldehyde oxime as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.23 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.64 (s, 9H, tBu), 6.06 (s, 1H, NOH), 6.72 (d, 1H), 7.50 (d, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 10.49 (s, 1H, OH).
Figure imgf000074_0001
Scheme B2
[00298] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with 3,5-di-tert-butyl-2- hydroxybenzaldehyde oxime (50 mg, 0.20 mmol), toluene (5 niL), 2,6-lutidine (0.07 niL, 0.60 mmol), iV-chlorosuccinimide (30 mg, 0.22 mmol), and benzonitrile (0.21 mL, 2.0 mmol). The reaction was heated at HO°C for 18h. The crude reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / CH2Cl2 = 5 / 1. Isolated 47 mg, 67% yield, of ligand Bl as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.35 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.70 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 6.89-7.03 (m, 3H), 7.71 (d, 1H), 7.75-7.78 (m, 2H), 8.42 (d, 1H), 10.35 (s, 1H, OH).
[00299] Ligands B2 and B3 were synthesized as described above for ligand Bl in yields of 46% and 52%, respectively.
[00300] Ligands B4-B6 were synthesized as described for Bl except 5.0 eq of nitrile was used instead of 10.0 eq. Ligand B4 was isolated in 32% yield, ligand B5 in 42% yield, and ligand B6 in 57% yield.
[00301] Section 1C. 4-Aryl Phenol Thiazole Ligands
Figure imgf000075_0001
Scheme Cl
[00302] n-BuLi (4.1 mL, 6.60 mmol, 1.6M in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of MOM-protected BB2 (1.92g, 5.5 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at -78°C under N2. After 30 min. at -78°C, triisopropylborate (1.65 mL, 7.15 mmol) was added and the reaction was warmed to rt. After Ih at rt, the reaction was quenched with MeOH (2 mL) then concentrated by rotary evaporation. The reaction flask was then charged, under N2, with 2,4-dibromothiazole (972 mg, 4.0 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (318 mg, 5 mol%), Na2CO3 (2.1 mL, 2.0M solution in H2O), and 1,2-dichloroethane (10 mL). The reaction was heated overnight at 8O°C. After cooling to rt, H2O was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted several times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were washed with H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Sodium sulfate was removed by filtration and to the organic solution was added cone. HCl (ImL). The solution was heated to 6O°C and monitored by TLC and GC/MS until deprotection of the phenol was complete (~2h). The reaction solution was washed with H2O, sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with 3-5% Et2O in Hexane. Isolated 1.1 g, 71% yield, of C24 as an off-white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.38 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 7.19 (s, 1H, CH, thiazole), 7.35-7.50 (m, 4H), 7.57 (d, 1H), 7.62-7.66 (m, 2H), 11.72 (s, 1H5 OH).
[00303] Ligands C25 and C27 were synthesized as described above for C24 in yields of 79% and 59%, respectively.
Figure imgf000076_0001
Scheme C2
[00304] n-BuLi (2.4 niL, 3.84 mmol, 1.6M in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of methyl-protected BBl (1.Og, 3.34 mmol) in Et2O (10 mL) at -78°C under N2. After 30 min. at -78°C, triisopropylborate (0.88 mL, 3.84 mmol) was added and the reaction was warmed to rt. After Ih at rt, the reaction was quenched with MeOH (2 mL) then concentrated by rotary evaporation. The reaction flask was then charged, under N2, with 2,4-dibromothiazole (486 mg, 2.0 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (116 mg, 5 mol%), Na2CO3 (1.1 mL, 2.0M solution in H2O), and toluene (10 mL). The reaction was heated overnight at 9O°C. After cooling to rt, H2O was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted several times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were washed with H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude reaction mixture was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (5.0 mL) and BBr3 (3.0 mL, 1.0M in CH2Cl2) was added dropwise at rt. After Ih, the reaction was quenched with several drops of MeOH, washed with H2O, sat. NH4Cl (aq.), brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with 1-2% Et2O in hexanes. Isolated 715 mg, 97% yield, of ligand C26 as a white solid.
Figure imgf000076_0002
Scheme C3 [00305] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with MOM-protected C24 (142 mg, 0.33 mmol), phenylboronic acid (43 mg, 0.35 mmol), Na2CO3 (0.2 mL, 2.0 M solution in H2O), Pd(PPh3)4 (20 mg, 5.0 mol%), and 1,2-dichloroethane (4 niL). The reaction was heated at 8O°C for 18h. Water was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were washed with water, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Sodium sulfate was removed by filtration and to the reaction solution was added cone. HCl (aq.) (1.0 mL) and MeOH (1.0 mL). After 2h at 6O°C, the reaction was washed with H2O, sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with 2-5% Et2O in hexanes. Isolated 57 mg, 45% yield, of ligand C2 as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 7.33-7.51 (m, 8H), 7.63-7.68 (m, 3H), 7.86-7.90 (m, 2H), 12.77 (s, 1H, OH). [00306] Ligands Cl, C3-C13, C20, and C21 were synthesized as described for C2 in yields ranging from 10-83%.
[00307] Ligand C15 was synthesized, in 81% yield, as described for C2 except toluene was used as solvent and the reaction was run at 9O°C.
[00308] Ligand C16 was synthesized as described for C2 except the phenol was protected as the methyl ether instead of the methoxy methyl ether. Ligand C16 was obtained after deprotection with BBr3 as described for C26. Ligand C16 was isolated in 32% yield.
Figure imgf000077_0001
Scheme C4
[00309] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with C24 (74 mg, 0.19 mmol),
2,6-dichlorophenylboronic acid (57 mg, 0.30 mmol), CsF (35 mg, 0.23 mmol), Pd(tBu3P)2 (5 mol%), and dioxane (2 mL). The reaction was heated at 100°C overnight. The crude reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with 2% Et2O in hexanes. Isolated 54mg, 54% yield, of C14 as a light yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 7.24-7.45 (m, 8H), 7.62-7.67 (m, 3H), 12.41 (s, 1H, OH). [00310] Ligands C18, C22, and C23 were synthesized as described for C14 in yields of 25%, 50%, and 37%, respectively.
[00311] Ligands C17 and C19 were synthesized as described for C14 but using
Pd(PPh3) 4, Na2CO3, and toluene. Yield of C17 was 60% and C19 was 54%.
Figure imgf000078_0001
Scheme C5
[00312] A reaction flask was charged with BB7 (50 mg, 0.21 minol), 2- aminothiophenol (0.023 mL, 0.21 mmol), and EtOH (2.0 niL). The reaction was heated at reflux for 2 days. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 20 / 1. Isolated 35 mg, 49% yield, of ligand C29 as a light yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.32 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.69 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 6.90-6.96 (m, 1H), 7.02-7.08 (m, 1H), 7.32 (m, 1H), 7.61-7.66 (m, 3H), 13.40 (s, 1H, OH).
[00313] Section ID. 2-Aryl Phenol Thiazole Ligands
Figure imgf000078_0002
Scheme Dl
[00314] sec-BuLi (4.3 mL, 6.0 mmol, 1.4M solution in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of 9-bromoanthracene (1.29 g, 5.0 mmol) in Et2O (20 mL) at O°C under N2. The reaction was held at O°C for 15 minutes then warmed to rt and stirred an additional 45 minutes. Triisopropylborate (1.5 mL, 6.5 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred at rt for 18h. Concentrated HCl (1.0 mL) and MeOH (1.0 mL) was added and the reaction was stirred for 30 minutes. The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted three times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were washed with H2O, sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Filtration and concentration gave 1.05 g of 9-anthraceneboronic acid.
[00315] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with 9-anthraceneboronic acid
(220 mg, 1.0 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (29 mg, 5.0 mol%), 2,4-dibromothiazole (122 mg, 0.5 mmol), Na2CO3 (0.5 mL, 2.0 M solution in H2O), and toluene (4.0 mL). The reaction was heated at 9O°C for 18h. After cooling to rt, water was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were washed with H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eiuting with 1% Et2O in hexanes. Isolated 93 mg, 50% yield, of 2-anthracenyl-4-bromothiazole.
Figure imgf000079_0001
[00316] n-BuLi (0.44 mL, 0.7 mmol, 1.6 M solution in cyclohexane) was added dropwise to a solution of MOM-protected BB2 (210 mg, 0.6 mmol) in Et2O (2.0 mL) at - 2O°C under N2. After 20 minutes at -2O°C, triisopropylborate (0.17 mL, 0.72 mmol) was added and the reaction was warmed to rt and stirred for Ih. The reaction was quenched with MeOH (1.0 mL) then concentrated by rotary evaporation. The reaction flask was then charged, under N2, with 2-anthracenyl-4-bromothiazole (93 mg, 0.27 mmol), Pd(PPh3) 4 (16 mg, 5.0 mol%), Na2CO3 (0.15 mL, 2.0 M solution in H2O), and toluene (2.0 mL). The reaction was heated at 9O°C for 18h. Water was added, the layers separated, and the aqueous phase extracted three times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were washed with H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Sodium sulfate was removed by filtration and to the reaction solution was added concentrated HCl (1.0 mL). The solution was heated at 6O°C for Ih. The reaction solution was washed with H2O, sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eiuting with 3-5% Et2O in hexanes. Isolated 32 mg, 24% yield, of ligand Dl as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz5 CDCl3) δ 1.53 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 7.26-7.52 (m, 8H), 7.59 (d, 2H), 7.72 (d, 2H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 8.00 (s, 1H), 8.06 (d, 2H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 11.98 (s, 1H, OH).
[00317] Ligands D2 and D3 were synthesized as described above in yields of 52% and 11%, respectively.
[00318] Section IE. Phenol (NH)-Imidazoles
Figure imgf000080_0001
Scheme El
[00319] BB8 (200 mg, 0.79 mmol), 4,4'-dimethylbenzil (187 mg, 0.79 mmol), ammonium acetate (485 mg, 6.30 mmol), and glacial acetic acid (4 mL) were combined and heated at HO°C for 6h. The reaction was diluted with CH2Cl2 then washed twice with H2O, twice with sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), once with brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The crude reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / CH2Cl2 = 1 / 1. Isolated 323 mg, 87% yield, of ligand ElO as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.33 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 2.07 (s, 3H, CH3), 2.09 (s, 3H, CH3), 6.91 (d, 2H), 6.97 (d, 2H), 7.07 (d, 2H), 7.20-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.34-7.39 (m, 2H), 7.59 (d, 1H), 7.77 (d, 2H), 7.97 (m, 2H), 8.70 (br s, 1H, NH), 13.78 (br s, 1H, OH).
[00320] Ligands E2-E9 and E11-E16 were prepared as described above for ligand
ElO in yields ranging from 64-88%.
Figure imgf000080_0002
Scheme E2 [00321] BB7 (59 mg, 0.25 mmol), 4,5-dimethyl-l,2-phenylenediamine (68 mg,
0.50 mmol), and glacial acetic acid (3 mL) were combined and heated at 118°C for 24h. The reaction was diluted with H2O then extracted three times with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc layers were washed once with H2O, twice with sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), once with brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 5 / 1. Isolated 80 mg, 91% yield, of ligand E18 as a light yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.39 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.73 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 2.13 (s, 3H, CH3), 2.20 (s, 3H, CH3), 6.72 (s, 1H), 7.12 (d, 1H), 7.47 (s, 1H), 7.64 (d, 1H), 8.21 (br s, 1H, NH), 14.34 (br s, OH).
[00322] Ligands El 7 and E19-E24 were synthesized as described above for ligand E18 in yields ranging from 61-91% with the exception of ligand E21 which was isolated in 31% yield.
[00323] Section IF. Phenol (NMe)-Imidazoles
Figure imgf000081_0001
Scheme Fl
[00324] A reaction flask was charged with ElO (173 mg, 0.37 mmol), Cs2CO3
(143 mg, 0.44 mmol), acetone (5 mL), and iodomethane (0.027 mL, 0.43 mmol). The reaction was heated at 4O°C for 24h. Acetone was removed by rotary evaporation and the crude reaction mixture was taken up in CH2Cl2. The CH2Cl2 solution was washed twice with H2O, once with brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 20 / 1 then 10 / 1. Isolated 122 mg, 66% yield, of ligand F7 as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.33 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 2.05 (s, 3H, CH3), 2.11 (s, 3H, CH3), 2.97 (s, 3H, CH3), 6.93-6.98 (m, 6H), 7.22-7.26 (m, 1H), 7.36-7.42 (m, 2H), 7.45 (d, 1H), 7.61 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 2H), 8.01 (d, 2H), 13.70 (br s, 1H, OH). [00325] Ligands F2-F6 and F8-F10 were synthesized as described above for F7 in yields ranging from 50-80%.
[00326] Ligand Fl was synthesized as described above for ligand F7 with the exception that K2CO3 was used instead Of Cs2CO3. Ligand Fl was isolated in 65% yield.
Figure imgf000082_0001
FF1 F11
Scheme F2
[00327] DDQ (2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-l,4-benzoquinone) (86 mg, 0.38 mmol) was added to a solution of imine FFl (117 mg, 0.35 mmol) in acetonitrile (6 mL) at rt. After 6h the crude reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 20 / 1. Isolated 65mg, 55% yield, of ligand FIl as a white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD2Cl2) δ 1.37 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.48 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 4.00 (s, 3H, CH3), 7.32-7.37 (m, 2H), 7.42-7.46 (m, 2H), 7.55 (d, 1H), 7.71-7.73 (m, 1H), 12.74 (br s, 1H, OH).
[00328] Fl was prepared by reacting BB7 with iV-methyl-l,2-phenylenediamine using techniques known to those of skill in the art.
[00329] Ligand F12 was synthesized in 62% yield as described above for ligand
FIl.
[00330] Section IG. Phenol Pyrazole Ligands
/ CuI
Figure imgf000082_0002
Figure imgf000082_0003
Scheme Gl
[00331] A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with 3-methylpyrazole (49 mg,
0.6 mmol), MOM-protected BB2 (175 mg, 0.50 mmol), CuI (10 mg, 0.05 mmol), K2PO4 (222 mg, 1.05 ramol), (trans)- 1,2-diaminocyclohexane (11.0 mg, 0.10 mmol), and dioxane (1.0 mL). The reaction was heated at 100°C for 2Oh. After cooling to rt, the reaction suspension was filtered through a small plug of silica gel washing through with CH2Cl2. The CH2Cl2 solution was washed with H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexane / Et2O = 95 / 5 to give 27 mg of the MOM-protected ligand. To the MOM-protected ligand, in 2 mL of CH2Cl2 / MeOH (1 / 1), was added 10 drops of cone. HCl. Deprotection was complete after 2h at 6O°C. The reaction was diluted with CH2Cl2 then washed with H2O, sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), brine, and dried over Na2SO4. Purified by passing through a small plug of silica gel using hexanes / Et2O = 80 / 20. Isolated 23 mg, 15% yield, of ligand G2 as an off-white solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.36 (s, 9H, ^u), 2.35 (s, 3H, CH3), 6.27 (d, 1H), 7.23 (d, 1H), 7.30 (d, 1H), 7.34 (m, 1H), 7.44 (m, 2H), 7.64 (m, 2H), 7.93 (d, 1H), 11.73 (s, 1H, OH).
[00332] Ligands Gl and G3 were synthesized as described above in isolated yields of 9% and 14%, respectively.
Figure imgf000083_0001
Scheme G2
[00333] Synthesis of GGl. Trifluoroacetic anhydride (1.35 mL, 9.52 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of 2,4-di-fert-butylanisole (2.0 g, 9.08 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium nitrate (2.9 g, 9.52 mmol) in CH2Cl2 at O°C under N2. The reaction was allowed to warm to rt. After 2h, the reaction was washed once with H2O, twice with 10% HCl (aq.), once with brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. The crude product mixture was cliromatographed on silica gel eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 40 / 1. Isolated 1.96 g, 81% yield, of GGl as a yellow solid.
[00334] Synthesis GG2. A reaction flask was charged, under N2, with GGl (133 mg, 0.50 mmol), 10% Pd/C (a couple of small. spatula scoops), EtOH (2.0 mL), and ammonium formate (158 mg, 2.50 mmol). After Ih at rt the reaction was filtered through a pad of Celite and washed through with EtOAc. The EtOAc solution was washed twice with H2O, once with brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Isolated 110 mg, 93% yield, of GG2 as a white solid. The product was used directly in the next step without further purification.
[00335] Synthesis of GG4. GG2 (110 mg, 0.47 mmol), 2-nitrobenzaldehyde (71 mg, 0.47 mmol), and p-TsOH (~ 10.0 mol%) were combined in THF (10 mL) over 3A molecular sieves. The reaction was heated at reflux for 4h. The sieves were removed by filtration and the reaction solution was concentrated to give imine GG3 as a yellow solid. GG3 was taken up in P(OEt)3 (1 mL) and heated at 100°C for 18h. The reaction mixture was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 20 / 1. Isolated 119 mg, 76% yield, of GG4 as a light yellow powder.
[00336] Synthesis of Ligand G4. BBr3 (0.51 mL, 1.0 M in CH2Cl2) was added dropwise to a solution of GG4 (115 mg, 0.34 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (4 mL) at -78°C under N2. The reaction was warmed slowly to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction was washed with sat. NaHCO3 (aq.), H2O, brine, and then dried over Na2SO4. Purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with hexanes / EtOAc = 10 / 1. Isolated 60 mg, 55% yield, of ligand G4 as a faint yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, C6D6) δ 1.32 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 1.68 (s, 9H, 'Bu), 6.93 (m, 1H), 7.10 (m, 2H), 7.42 (d, 1H), 7.52 (d, 1H), 7.57 (d, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 12.70 (s, 1H, OH).
[00337] Section 2. Primary Screening
[00338] Section 2A. General Protocols and Materials
[00339] AU air sensitive procedures were performed under a purified argon or nitrogen atmosphere in a Vacuum Atmospheres or MBraun glove box. AU solvents used were anhydrous, de-oxygenated and purified according to known techniques. All ligands and metal precursors were prepared according to procedures known to those of skill in the art, e.g., under inert atmosphere conditions, etc.
[00340] Group 13 reageants were purchased from Strem Chemicals Inc.
(Newburyport, MA) and Azko Chemical Ine. (Chicago, IL). Activators were purchased from Boulder Scientific Company (Mead, CO) or prepared according to procedures known to those of skill in the art.
[00341] Section 2Bi. 1-Octene Homopolymerization Examples in a 96-well
Format
[00342] 1-Octene homopolymerization reactions were performed in a 96-well format using 8 mm x 30 mm tarred glass vials arranged in an 8 x 12 array within an aluminum block. Reagents were added from stock solutions or slurries to the 8 mm x 30 mm vials using a Cavro liquid handling robot driven by library design and/or automation software, such as Library Studio® and Impressionist® software, available from Symyx Technologies, Inc., of Santa Clara, California, which is described in European Patent No. 1080435, U.S. Patent No. 6,507,645, and European Patent No. 1Ϊ75645. The vials contain parylene coated stir-bars and were weighed prior to their use in screening (described below). Solutions of a parent array of desired ligands were transferred to arrays of glass vials (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) and the solvent was then removed from the ligand array using a nitrogen or argon stream. The resultant ligand array was contacted with a suitable group IV precursor, a group 13 reagent, 100 μl of 1-octene and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution). A Teflon sheet and rubber gasket were then placed over the top of the array and an aluminum cover was screwed on the top to seal the array (reactor A). Specific details are described below. The aluminum block reactor (reactor A) has been described in U.S. Patent No. 6,507,645, which is incorporated by reference herein.
[00343] Section 2BiL Stock Solutions
[00344] Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 - 20 mmol/1: Ti(CH2C6H5)4; Zr(CH2C6H5)4; Hf(CH2C6H5)4; Ti(N(CH3)2)4; Zr(N(CH3)2)4; Hf(N(CH3)2)4; TiC12(N(CH3)2)2. [00345] Solutions of group 13 reagents were prepared in toluene typically at 50 -
250 mmol/1: Al(Me)3, (TMA); Al(Et)3, (TEA); AlCBu)3,(TIBA); PMAO-IP & MMAO-
3A. Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL.
[00346] Solutions of activators were prepared in toluene typically at 4 - 10 mmol/1; B(C6F5)3; [C(C6H5)3]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (TBF20); [HN(CH3)2Ph]+[B(C6F5)4]-,
(ABF20).
[00347] Section 2Biii. In-Situ Preparation and Screening of Ligand-Group IV
Compositions
[00348] Method 1: 75°C Complexation, Reactor A, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (15-30 μL per well, 0.3 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75 °C. The array was then treated with a stock solution- of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), followed by 100 μl of 1- octene, and finally an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well). Immediately a Teflon sheet and rubber gasket were then placed over the top of the array and an aluminum cover was screwed on the top to seal the array (reactor A) and the array was stirred at 75°C for 1 hour.
[00349] Section 2Biv. Product Analysis
[00350] After 1 hour the reactor was unsealed and the array was removed. The array of vials was then transferred to a fume hood, and to each vial was quenched by 100 - 300 μL of methanol. The volatiles were removed by using a nitrogen stream, followed by drying the array over-night in vacuo. The vials were weighed in order to determine the yield of polymer produced. 800 μL of toluene was added to select and the resulting toluene solutions were mechanically agitated for approximately an hour. An aliquot was injected into a rapid-GPC in order to determine Mw. Table 2A presents the results from the 1-octene homopolymerization reactions performed in a 96-well format.
Figure imgf000087_0001
[00351] Section 2Ci. Ethylene-Styrene Copolymerization Examples in a 96-well
Format
[00352] Ethylene-styrene copolymerization reactions were performed in a 96-well format using 8 mm x 30 mm tarred glass vials arranged in an 8 x 12 array within an aluminum block. Reagents were added from stock solutions or slurries to the 8 mm x 30 mm vials using a Cavro liquid handling robot driven by library design and/or automation software, such as Library Studio® and Impressionist® software, available from Symyx Technologies, Inc., of Santa Clara, California, which is described in European Patent No. 1080435, U.S. Patent No. 6,507,645, and European Patent No. 1175645. The vials contain parylene coated stir-bars and were weighed prior to their use in screening (described below). Solutions of a parent array of desired ligands were transferred to arrays of glass vials (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) and the solvent was then removed from the ligand array using a nitrogen or argon stream. The resultant ligand array was contacted with a suitable group IV precursor, a group 13 reagent and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution), followed by 20 μl of styrene. The array was sealed with a reactor top capable of delivering gaseous reagent(s) (reactor B) and pressurized with ethylene. Specific details are described below. The HiP reactor (reactor B) is described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2003- 0161763, which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00353] Section 2CiL Stock Solutions
[00354] Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 - 20 mmol/1: Ti(CH2C6H5)4; Zr(CH2C6H5)4; Hf(CH2C6H5)4; Ti(N(CH3)2)4; Zr(N(CH3)2)4;
Hf(N(CH3)2)4; TiCl2(N(CH3)2)2.
[00355] Solutions of group 13 reagents were prepared in toluene typically at 50 -
250 mmol/1: Al(Me)3, (TMA); Al(Et)3, (TEA); Al(iBu)3,(TIBA); PMAO-IP & MMAO-
3A. Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL.
[00356] Solutions of activators were prepared in toluene typically at 4 - 10 mmol/1; B(C6F5),; [C(C6H5)3]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (TBF20); [HN(CH3)2Ph]+[B(C6F5)4]-,
(ABF20).
[00357] Section 2Ciii. In-Situ Preparation and Screening of Ligand-Group IV
Compositions [00358] Method 1: 75°C Complexation, Reactor B, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene {pa. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 μL per well, 0.3 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75°C. The array was then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well, contact time of < 5 min). 20 μl of styrene was added to each vial, and the array was immediately sealed using a reactor top capable of delivering gaseous reagent(s) (reactor B) and stirred at 75°C under 50 psi of ethylene for 1 hour.
[00359] Section 2Civ. Product Analysis
[00360] After 1 hour the reactor was depressurized and the array was removed.
The array of vials was then transferred to a fume hood, and to each vial was quenched by 500μL of acidified methanol. A Teflon sheet and rubber gasket are then placed over the top of the array and an aluminum cover was screwed on the top to seal the array. The array was. first mechanically agitated for approximately an hour and then centrifuged at 1500 rpm for 10 minutes. The acidified methanol solution was decanted off. This process was repeated twice more with acidified methanol, followed by three washing rounds using methylethylketone (MEK) to remove soluble polystyrene. The array was then dried over-night in vacuo. The vials were weighed in order to determine the yield of polymer produced. 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene (TCB) was added vials which met a minimum yield criteria, and the resulting TCB solutions were heated for 2 hours at 14O°C. An aliquot of the hot solution was deposited on a wafer, in order to form a thin film. The resultant polymer thin-films were analyzed via a rapid FT-IR method (details in the secondary screening section) to determine total mol % styrene. Table 2B presents the results from the ethylene-styrene copolymerization reactions performed in a 96-well format.
Figure imgf000090_0001
[00361] Section 2Di. Propylene Homopolymerization Examples in a 96-well
Format
[00362] Propylene homopolymerization reactions were performed in a 96-well format using 8 mm x 30 mm tarred glass vials arranged in an 8 x 12 array within an aluminum block. Reagents were added from stock solutions or slurries to the 8 mm x 30 mm vials using a Cavro liquid handling robot driven library design and/or automation software, such as Library Studio® and Impressionist® software, available from Symyx Technologies, Inc., of Santa Clara, California, which is described in European Patent No. 1080435, U.S. Patent No. 6,507,645, and European Patent No. 1175645. The vials contain parylene coated stir-bars and were weighed prior to their use in screening (described below). Solutions of a parent array of desired ligands were transferred to arrays of glass vials (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) and the solvent was then removed from the ligand array using a nitrogen or argon stream. The resultant ligand array under went two possible paths: i) the ligand array was contacted with a suitable group FV precursor, a group 13 reagent and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution), sealed with a reactor top capable of delivering gaseous reagent(s) (reactor B) and pressurized with propylene; or ii) the ligand array was contacted with a suitable group IV precursor, a group 13 reagent, pressurized with propylene within a parallel batch reactor with in situ injection capability (reactor C), upon reaching the desired reaction pressure within the reactor, an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution) was added via in situ injection. Specific details are described below. The HiP reactor (reactor B) is described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2003-0161763, and the parallel batch reactor (reactor C) is described in WO 04/060550 and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2004/0121448, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00363] Section 2Dii. Stock Solutions
[00364] Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 mmol/1: Ti(CH2C6H5)4; Zr(CH2C6H5)4; Hf(CH2C6H5)4; Ti(N(CH3)2)4; Zr(N(CH3)2)4; Hf(N(CH3)2)4; TiCl2(N(CH3)2)2. [Zr(CH2C6H5)3 +][C6HsCH2B(C6Fs)3-] and [Hf(CH2C6H5)3 +] [C6H5CH2B(C6F5)3-] were generated in situ within the 96 well arrays by addition of 0.3 μmol of M(CH2C6H5)4 followed by 0.3 μmol of B(C6Fs)3. [00365] Solutions of group 13 reagents were prepared in toluene typically at 50 -
250 mmol/1: Al(Me)3, (TMA); Al(Et)3, (TEA); AlCBu)3-(TIBA); PMAO-IP & MMAO- 3A. Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL. [00366] Solutions of activators were prepared in toluene typically at 4 - 10 mmol/1; B(C6F5)3, (BF15); [C(C6H5)3]+[B(C6F5)4]", (TBF20); [HN(CH3)2Ph]+[B(C6F5)4]', (ABF20); [HN(C6H15)2(-para-C4H9-Ph)]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (SJBF20). SJBF20 + BF 15 was prepared before use as a toluene solution.
[00367] Section 2Diii. In-Situ Preparation and Screening of Ligand-Group IV
Compositions
[00368] Method 1: 75°C Complexation, Reactor B, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 μL per well, 0.3 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75°C. The array was then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well, contact time of ≤ 5 min). The array was sealed using a reactor top capable of delivering gaseous reagent(s) (reactor B) and stirred at 75°C under 80 psi of propylene for 1 hour.
[00369] Method 2: 75°C Complexation, Reactor C, 75°C Screening: the ligand array (0.3 - 0.6 μmol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (30 μL per well, 0.3 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 30-45 minutes at 75°C. The array was then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min), while aging, the array was inserted into a heated (75°C ) parallel batch reactor with in situ injection capability (reactor C), which was subsequently pressured to 80 psi propylene. Following the ca. 10 minutes of aging (and at 80 psi propylene), an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well) was added via in situ injection to the array. Post activation step, the array continued to be stirred while the reactor was at 75°C under 80 psi of propylene for 1 hour.
[00370] Section 2Div. Product Analysis [00371] After 1 hour the reactor was depressurized and the array was removed.
The array of vials was then transferred to a fume hood, and to each vial was quenched by added 100 - 300 uL of methanol. The volatiles were removed by using a nitrogen stream, followed by drying the array over-night in vacuo. The vials were weighed in order to determine the yield of polymer produced. 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene (TCB) was added vials which met a minimum yield criteria, and the resulting TCB solutions were heated for 2 hours at 140°C. An aliquot of the hot solution was deposited on a wafer, in order to form a thin film. The resultant polymer thin-films were analyzed via a rapid-FT-IR method (details in the secondary screening section) to determine tacticity. Table 2C presents the results from the propylene homopolymerization reactions performed in a 96-well format.
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
[00372] Section 3. Secondary Screening
[00373] Additional general analytical procedures:
[00374] High temperature Size Exclusion Chromatography was performed using an automated "Rapid GPC" system as described in U.S. Patents 6,491,816, 6,491,823, 6,475,391, 6,461,515, 6, 436,292, 6,406,632, 6,175,409, 6,454,947, 6,260,407, and 6,294,388 each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In the current apparatus, a series of two 30 cm x 7.5 mm linear columns in used, with both columns containing PLgel lOum, MixB (available from Polymer Labs). The GPC system was calibrated using narrow polystyrene standards. Unless otherwise indicated, the system was operated at an eluent flow rate of 1.5 mL/min and an oven temperature of 160°C; o- dichlorobenzene was used as the eluent; the polymer samples were dissolved 1,2,4- trichlorobenzene at a concentration of about 5 mg/mL; 200 μL of a polymer solution were injected into the system; and the concentration of the polymer in the eluent was monitored using an evaporative light scattering detector. All of the molecular weight results obtained are relative to linear polystyrene standards.
[00375] Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) measurements were performed on a TA instrument DSC 2920 to determine the melting point of polymers. 10 - 30 mg of polymer were despoited as a 200 mg/mL solutions in 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene into an Aluminium substrate and dried. The sample was dried under vacuum for 4 hours at 185°C; afterwards the sample was allowed to cool to room temperature ("RT") overnight while under vacuum. The sample was heated to 300°C at a rate of 10°C /min and data were collected during that heating period. Reported are the peak maxima of the melting transition. In case of multiple peaks in the transition, multiple melting temperatures are reported, ("#/#").
[00376] Section 3A. Propylene Polymerizations using metal-ligand compositions: A total of 23 separate polymerization reactions were performed as follows.
[00377] Section 3Ai. Preparation of the polymerization reactor prior to injection of catalyst composition
[00378] Method A: A pre-weighed glass vial insert and disposable stirring paddle were fitted to each reaction vessel of the reactor. The reactor was then closed, 0.200 mL of a 0.05 M solution of Modified Methylaluminoxane 3A (from Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, II) ("MMAO") in toluene and 3.8 mL of toluene were injected into each pressure reaction vessel through a valve. The temperature was then set to the appropriate setting (with specific temperatures for each polymerization being listed in Table 3A and Table 3B, below), and the stirring speed was set to 800 rpm unless otherwise noted. The mixture was exposed to propylene at 100 psi pressure. A propylene pressure of 100 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment.
[00379] Section 3 AU. In situ preparation of metal-ligand compositions
[00380] The following methods were employed to prepare the metal-ligand compositions as indicated in Table 3 A and Table 3 C. Method ZA: 24 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in 1,2-dichloroethane) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the 1 mL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (50 μL) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 35 min. Method ZB: Similar to Method ZA except that 60 μl of the ligand solution (10 mM in 1,2-dichloroethane) was dispensed in the 1 mL glass vial. Method ZC: 48 μl of the ligand solution (25 mM in 1,2-dichloroethane) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the 1 mL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (50 μL) followed by the addition of 0.5 mol equivalents of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 35 min. Method ZD: Similar to Method ZC except that 120 μL of the ligand solution (10 mM in 1,2- dichloroethane) was dispensed in the ImL glass vial. Method ZE: Similar to Method ZC except that 60 μL of toluene (instead of 50 μL) was added to the ImL glass vial containing the ligand prior to the addition of the metal precursor and the reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature prior to screening. Method ZF: 40 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a ImL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (100 μL) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of the metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature prior to screening. Method ZG: 80 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a ImL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (100 μL) followed by the addition of 0.5 mol equivalents of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature prior to screening. Method ZH: 48 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a ImL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (60 μL) followed by the addition of 0.5 mol equivalents of the metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 45 min. Method ZI: Similar to Method ZH except that 40 μL (instead of 50 μL) of toluene was added to the 1 mL glass vial prior to the addition of the metal precursor and the reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature prior to screening. Method ZJ: 24 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in 1,2-dicliloroethane) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (40 μL) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of metal precursor solution (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal- ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 75 °C for 45 min. Method ZK: Similar to Method ZJ except that 24 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in the 1 mL glass vial. Method ZL: Similar to ZH except that 96 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in the 1 mL glass vial. Method ZM: Similar to Method ZJ except that 48 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in the ImL glass vial. Method ZN: 40 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the ImL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (100 μL) followed by the addition of 0.5 mol equivalents of the metal precursor (10 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was kept at ambient temperature for over 1 h prior to screening. Method ZO: Similar to method ZN except that 100 μL of the ligand solution ( 10 mM in toluene) was dispensed into the ImL glass vial. Method ZP: Similar to Method ZN except that 60 μL (instead of 100 μL) of toluene was added to the 1 mL glass vial prior to the addition of metal precursor. Method ZQ: 20 μL of the ligand solution (25 mM in toluene) was dispensed in a 1 mL glass vial followed by the removal of solvent. To the 1 mL glass vial containing the ligand was added toluene (40 μL ) followed by the addition of an equimolar amount of the metal precursor (5 mM in toluene) to form the metal-ligand composition solution. The reaction mixture was heated at 70 °C for 1 h. Method ZR: Similar to Method ZQ except that a 25 mM ligand solution in 1,2-dichloroethane was used.
[00381] Section 3Aiii. Preparation of the group 13 reagent and activator stock solutions.
[00382] The "activator solution" is a solution of N,N'-dimethylanilinium tetrakis
(pentafluorophenyl) borate ("ABF20") in toluene or a solution of a 1:2 (molar ratio) mixture of N,N'-dimethylanilinium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ("ABF20") and tris(pentafluorophenyl)borane ("BF15") in toluene (the mixture is abbreviated as "ABF20/BF15", also as "ABC") . The identity and molarity of this solution is indicated in the "activation method" of the individual example described below. The ABF20 and ABC solutions are heated to approximately 85°C to dissolve the reagent. The "group 13 reagent" solution is either a solution of trimethylaluminum ("TMA"), triisobutylaluminium ("TIBA") or a solution of nonhydrolytic polymethylaluminoxane (Akzo Nobel PMAO-IP, referred to below as "PMAO", available from Akzo Nobel Polymer Chemicals, Chicago, Illinois, USA), all "group 13 reagent" solutions were in toluene. The molarity of the solutions used is indicated in the "activation method" of the individual example described below.
[00383] Section 3Aiv. Activation methods and injection of solutions into the pressure reactor vessel
[00384] The following methods were employed to activate and inject the metal- ligand compositions for the examples in Tables 3A and 3C: Method AAAA: To the 1 mL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 mM solution, containing the indicated equivalents of group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added. After about 11 minutes, 1.1 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator solution (2.5 mM) was added to the 15 mL vial and the reaction mixture was mixed. Approximately 30 seconds later, a fraction of the 1 mL vial contents corresponding to the indicated "catalyst amount injected", based on micromoles (μmol) of metal precursor, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to bring the total volume injected to 0.8 mL. Method BBBB: To the 1 mL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 niM solution, containing the indicated equivalents group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added. After about 11 minutes, 1.1 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the "activator solution" (2.5 niM) was added to the 1 mL vial followed by an immediate addition of 750 μL of toluene. The contents of the ImL vial were mixed. Approximately 30 seconds later, a fraction of the 1 mL vial contents corresponding to the indicated "catalyst amount injected", based on micromoles (μmol) of metal precursor, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to bring the total volume injected to 0.5 mL. Method CCCC: Similar to Method AAAA except that the activator solution was a toluene solution of the mixture of ABF20 and BF15 (2.5mM ABF20/5mM BF15) and a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) was used. Method DDDD: Similar to method AAAA except that 200 mM of group 13 reagent solution and 5 mM activator solution were used (instead of 50 mM and 2.5 mM respectively) and the total volume injected was 1.0 mL (instead of 0.8 mL). Method EEEE: Similar to Method DDDD except that a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator (5 mM ABF20/10 mM BF15) was used. Method FFFF: Similar to method BBBB except that a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator (2.5 mM ABF20/5.0 mM BF15) was used and 400 μL of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator. Method GGGG: Similar to method AAAA except that a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator solution (2.5mM ABF20/5.0mM BF15) was used and the total volume injected to the reaction vessel was 0.5 mL (instead of 0.8 mL). Method HHHH: To the 1 mL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 mM solution, containing the indicated equivalents group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added. After 45 seconds, a total of 3.3 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator solution (2.5 mM ABF20/5 mM BF15) was added and the reaction mixture was mixed. Approximately 90 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected", based on micromoles (μmol) of metal precursor, was injected into the pre- pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to bring the total volume injected to 0.500 mL. Method IHI: Similar to method AAAA except that the total volume injected was 0.5 mL (instead of 0.8 mL). Method JJJJ: Similar to Method HHHH except that 200 mM of group 13 reagent solution and 5mM ABF20/10mM BF15 were used and the total volume injected to the pre-pressurized reaction vessel was 0.8 niL. Method KKKK: To the 1 niL glass vial containing the metal-ligand composition, the appropriate amount of the group 13 reagent solution as a 50 mM solution, containing the indicated equivalents of group 13 reagent (per metal precursor) in the specific example, was added followed by an immediate addition of 300 μL of toluene. After 45 seconds, 1.1 mol equivalents (per metal precursor) of the activator solution (2.5 mM) was added to the 1 mL vial followed by an immediate addition of another 300 μL of toluene and the reaction mixture was mixed. Approximately 90 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected", based on micromoles (μmol) of metal precursor, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to increase the total volume injected to 0.500 mL. Method LLLL: Similar to Method HHHH except that 1.1 mol equivalents of activator solution (2.5 mM) was used. Method MMMM: Similar to Method AAAA except that the total volume injected to the pre-pressurized reaction vessel was 0.5 mL. Method NNNN: Similar to method AAAA except that the total volume injected was 1.0 mL (instead of 0.8 mL).
[00385] Section 3Av. Polymerization
[00386] The polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-1800 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control. The specific polymerization times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3A. After the reaction time elapsed, the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor. The polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction.
[00387] Section 3 AvL Product work up: Propylene Polymerizations
[00388] After the polymerization reaction, the glass vial insert, containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box. The volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After most of the volatile components had evaporated, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product. The polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above, to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and by FTIR spectroscopy to determine the crystallinity index. The melting point of selected samples was measured by DSC, as described above.
[00389] Section 3B. Propylene Polymerizations using isolated complexes:
A total of 5 separate polymerization reactions were performed as follows. (Table 3B)
[00390] Section 3Bi. Preparation of the polymerization reactor prior to injection of catalyst composition
[00391] The polymerization reactor was prepared in the manner described in
Section 3 Ai, method A.
[00392] Section 3BH. Preparation of the group 13 reagent and activator stock solutions
[00393] The "activator solution" is either a solution of N,N'-dimethylanilinium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ("ABF2o") in toluene or .a solution of trityl tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ("TBF20") in toluene. The "ABF20" solution is heated to approximately 85°C to dissolve the reagent. The "TBF20" solution is at ambient temperature. The molarity is indicated in the "activation method" of the individual example described below. The "group 13 reagent solution" is either a solution of trimethylaluminium ("TMA") or a solution of tri-isobutyl aluminium ("TIBA"). The molarity of the solutions used is indicated in the "activation method" of the individual example described below.
[00394] Section 3Biii. Activation method and injection of solutions into the pressure reactor vessel
[00395] The following method was employed to activate and inject the isolated complexes as indicated in Table 3B. Method AA: 40 μL of a 5OmM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 80 μL of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.4 μmol metal complex was added. After about 12 min, 176 μL of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 niM) was added to the 1 niL vial and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed. Approximately 70 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected" in Table 3B, based on micromoles (μmol) of metal complex, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to increase the total volume injected to 0.500 mL.
[00396] Section 3Biv. Polymerization
[00397] The polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-1800 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control. The specific polymerization times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3B. After the reaction time elapsed, the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor. The polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction.
[00398] Section 3Bv. Product work up: Propylene Polymerizations
[00399] After the polymerization reaction, the glass vial insert, containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box. The volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After most of the volatile components had evaporated, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product. The polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above, to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and by FTIR spectroscopy to determine the crystallinity index.
[00400] Section 3C. Etliylene-1-Octene copolymerizations using metal-ligand compositions
[00401] A total of 29 separate ethylene- 1-octene polymerization reactions were performed as follows. (Table 3C) [00402] Section 3Ci. Preparation of the polymerization reactor prior to injection of catalyst composition
[00403] Method B: A pre- weighed glass vial insert and disposable stirring paddle were fitted to each reaction vessel of the reactor. The reactor was then closed, 0.200 niL of a 0.05 M solution of Modified Methylaluminoxane 3A (from Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, II) ("MMAO") in toluene, 0.400 mL of octene and 4.4 niL of toluene were injected into each pressure reaction vessel through a valve. The temperature was then set to the appropriate setting (with specific temperatures for each polymerization being listed in Table 3 C and Table 3D, below), and the stirring speed was set to 800 rpm unless otherwise noted. The mixture was exposed to ethylene at 100 psi pressure. An ethylene pressure of 100 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment. [00404] Method C: Method C is similar to method B except that 0.200 mL of a
0.05 M solution of PMAO in toluene was injected (instead of MMAO).
[00405] Section 3Cii. Preparation of Metal-ligand Compositions
[00406] The metal-ligand compositions were prepared as described in Section
3Aii, above.
[00407] Section 3Ciii. Activation methods and injection of solutions into the pressure reactor vessel
[00408] The methods used for activating and injecting the catalyst into the reactor are described in Section 3Aiv above.
[00409] Section 3Civ. Polymerization
[00410] The polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-1800 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control. The specific times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3 C. The polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction. After the reaction time elapsed, the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor. [00411 ] Section 3Cv. Product work up : ethylene/1-octene copolymerizations
[00412] After the polymerization reaction, the glass vial insert, containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box. The volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After substantial evaporation of the volatile components, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product. The polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and FTIR spectroscopy to determine the comonomer incorporation. Results are presented in Table 3C.
[00413] Section 3D. Ethylene-1-Octene copolymerizations using isolated complexes
[00414] A total of 33 separate ethylene- 1-octene polymerization reactions were performed as follows. (Table 3D)
[00415] Section 3Di. Preparation of the polymerization reactor prior to injection of catalyst composition
[00416] The reactor was prepared as described in Methods B and C, above. In some examples hydrogen (as a mixture with nitrogen) was added; the amount added is noted in Table 3D. An ethylene pressure of 100 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment.
[00417] Section 3DH. Preparation of the group 13 reagent and activator stock solutions
[00418] The "activator solution" is either a 2.5 mM solution of N,N'- dimethylanilinium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ("ABF20") in toluene or a 400 mM solution of Modified Methylaluminoxane - 3A (Azko) ("MMAO") in toluene. The "ABF20" solution is heated to approximately 85°C to dissolve the reagent. The "MMAO" solution is at ambient temperature. The group 13 reagent solution is either a solution of triisobutylaluminium or modified methalumoxane-3 A ("MMAO") in toluene. The molarity of the group 13 reagent is noted below and the molar equivalents is noted in Table 3D.
[00419] Section 3Diii. Activation methods and Injection of solutions into the pressure reactor vessel
[00420] Method AAA: 75 μL of a 20 mM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 niL vial. 60 μL of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.3 μmol metal complex was added. After about 45 seconds, 132 μL of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 mM) was added to the 1 mL vial followed by an immediate addition of 700 μL of toluene and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed. Approximately 80 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected" in 3D, based on micromoles (μmol) of metal complex, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to increase the total volume injected to 0.500 mL. Method BBB: Similar to Method AAA, except that 340 μL of toluene (instead of 700 μL) was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator. Method CCC: Similar to Method BBB, except that 150 μL of a 400 mM activator solution was used. Method DDD: Similar to Method CCC, except that 150 μL of a 400 mM group 13 reagent solution was added to the ImL vial prior to the addition of the metal complex and 700 μL (instead of 340 μL) of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator. Method EEE: Similar to Method DDD except that 340 μL of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator. Method FFF Similar to Method AAA, except that 340 μL (instead of 700 μL) of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial immediately after the activator. Method GGG Similar to Method CCC except that 700 μL (instead of 340 μL) of toluene was added immediately after the activator. Method HHH: 50 μL of a 20 mM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 50 μL of complex solution (4 mM in toluene) containing 0.2 μmol metal complex was added. After about 12 min, 88 μL of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 mM) was added to the 1 mL vial immediately followed by the addition of 800 μL of toluene and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed. Approximately 70 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected" in Table 3D, based on micromoles (μmol) of metal complex, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to increase the total volume injected to 0.500 niL. Method III: Similar to Method HHH except that 50 μL of the activator solution (400 mM) was used. Method JJJ: Similar to Method AAA except that 300 μL of toluene was added immediately after the activator. Method KKK: Similar to Method JJJ except that no toluene was added after the activator. Method LLL. Similar to Method JJJ except that only 450 μL of toluene (not "activator") was added to the ImL vial after the complex ("catalyst precursor" was activated inside the reaction vessel). Method MMM: Similar to Method LLL except that 150 μL of toluene was added after complex. Method NNN: 40 μL of a 5OmM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 80 μL of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.4 μmol metal complex was added. After about 12 min, 176 μL of the activator solution in toluene (2.5 mM) was added to the 1 mL vial immediately followed by 800 μL of toluene and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed. Approximately 70 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected" in Table 3D, based on micromoles (μmol) of metal complex, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to increase the total volume injected to 0.500 mL. Method OOO: 40 μL of a 50 mM solution of the group 13 reagent was dispensed into a 1 mL vial. 80 μL of complex solution (5 mM in toluene) containing 0.4 μmol metal complex was added. After about 12 min, 1000 μL of toluene was added and the contents of the 1 mL vial were mixed. Approximately 70 seconds later a fraction of the total 1 mL vial contents containing the indicated "catalyst amount injected" in Table 3D, based on micromoles (μmol) of metal complex, was injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and was followed immediately by injection of toluene to increase the total volume injected to 0.500 mL. Method PPP: Similar to Method OOO except that 500 μL of toluene was added to the 1 mL vial prior to the final mixing.
[00421] Section 3Div. Polymerization
[00422] The polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 60-600 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control. The specific times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3D. The polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction. After the reaction time elapsed, the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor.
[00423] Section 3Dv. Product work up: ethylene/1 -octene copolymerizations
[00424] After the polymerization reaction, the glass vial insert, containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box. The volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After substantial evaporation of the volatile components, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product. The polymer product was then analyzed by rapid GPC, as described above to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and FTIR spectroscopy to determine the comonomer incorporation. Results are presented in Table 3D.
[00425] Section 3E: Styrene polymerizations in 12-well format
[00426] Section 3Ei: Stock Solutions: Solutions of metal precursors were prepared in toluene typically at 10 - 20 mmol/1: Ti(CH2C6H5)4; Zr(CH2C6H5)4; Hf(CH2C6H5)4; Ti(N(CH3)2)4; Zr(N(CH3)2)4; Hf(N(CH3)2)4; TiCl2(N(CH3)2)2; [Ti(CH2C6H5)3 +][C6H5CH2B(C6Fs)3-]; [Zr(CH2C6H5)3 +][C6HsCH2B(C6F5)3-] and [Hf(CH2C6H5)3 +][C6H5CH2B(C6Fs)3 "] were generated in situ within the 12 well arrays by addition of M(CH2C6H5)4 followed by 1 equivalent of B(C6Fs)3. Solutions of group 13 reagents were prepared in toluene typically at 50 - 250 mmol/1: Al(Me)3, (TMA); Al(Et)3, (TEA); Al(iBu)3,(TIBA); PMAO-IP & MMAO-3A. Alumoxanes were supplied by Azko Chemical Inc., Chicago, IL. Solutions of activators were prepared in toluene typically at 4 - 10 mmol/1, except MAO's (0.5 - 1 mol/1); B(C6Fs)3; [C(C6Hs)3]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (TBF20); [HN(CH3)2Ph]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (ABF20); [HN(C6H13)2(- para-C4H9-Ph)]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (SJBF20); [HN(C10H21)2(-/wa-C4H9-Ph)]+[B(C6F5)4]-, (SJ2BF20); PMAO-IP and MMA0-3A.
[00427] Section 3EH: Reactor Set-up: Organized in 4 x 3 arrays within an aluminum block, pre-mix catalyst solutions were prepared 8*30 mm vials (containing parylene coated stir-bars) using a pipette or liquid handling robot driven by software (available from Symyx Technologies, Inc., Santa Clara and described within EP 1080435, US 6507645, and EP 1175645). The pre-mix catalyst solutions contain toluene; one or two ligands (0.3 - 1.5 μmol); a specified group IV metal precursor; a group 13 reagent; and an activator (or combination of group 13 reagents and activators, from a stock solution). Aliquots of pre-mix catalyst solutions were transferred to 15 mL tarred glass vials containing Teflon coated stir bars; styrene; solvent; and a group 13 scavenger. The 15 mL vials were housed in a large aluminum block (4 x 3 array reactor) mounted on a heater pre-set at the desired polymerization temperature with pot-magnet stirring (each vial has dedicated stirring). Each vial was sealed during the allotted experiment time with a Teflon coated speta seated within a latched Al cover. The reactor was a parallel reactor with quenching capability.
[00428] Section 3Eiii: Polymerization conditions: Seven different processing conditions were used for these polymerizations, with the conditions being presented in Table 3E by reference to the method number. Method 1 : In-situ Complexation: 1 ligand species per' well; 25°C complexation, 105°C reaction temperature; ca. 4 mL total volume per well: The ligand array (1.0 - 2.0 μmol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (15-60 μL per well, 0.5 - 1.0 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 45 - 60 minutes at 25°C within an Al block (pre-mix array). Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min, 25°C), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well, contact time of ca. 2 min, 25°C). Individual aliquots of the solutions contained within the pre-mix array were transferred to 15 mL tarred glass vials containing Teflon coated stir bars; 2.0 mL of styrene, 2.0 ml toluene and a group 13 scavenger (10 μmol). The vials were housed within a reactor, with its heater pre-set at 105°C temperature; and it stirrer set at 300 - 800 rpm. 2 - 25 minutes post addition of the catalyst solutions, the vials were removed from the reactor; placed into a RT Al block; and 3 mL of cold toluene was injected into each well. The 15 mL vials were then removed from the glove box and transferred to a fume hood to be quenched with 5 mL of methanol. Method 2: In-situ Complexation; 1 ligand species per well; 75°C complexation, 105°C reaction temperature; ca. 4 mL total volume per well: The ligand array (1.0 - 2.0 μmol of each ligand) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (15-60 μL per well, 0.5 - 1.0 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred for a period of 45 minutes at 75°C within an Al block (pre-mix array). The pre-mix array was allowed to cool to RT {ca. 25°C). Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min, 25°C), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well, contact time of ca. 2 min, 25°C). Individual aliquots of the solutions contained within the pre- mix array were transferred to 15 mL tarred glass vials containing Teflon coated stir bars; 2.0 mL of styrene, 2.0 ml toluene and a group 13 scavenger (10 μmol). The vials were housed within a reactor, with its heater pre-set at 105°C temperature; and it stirrer set at 300 - 800 rpm. 2 - 25 minutes post addition of the catalyst solutions, the vials were removed from the reactor; placed into a RT Al block; and 3 mL of cold toluene was injected into each well. The 15 mL vials were then removed from the glove box and transferred to a fume hood to be quenched with 5 mL of methanol. Method 3: In-situ Complexation: 2 ligand species per well; 25°C complexation, 105°C reaction temperature; ca. 4 mL total volume per well: The ligand array (0.75 μmol of each ligand 1) was first contacted with toluene {ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (50 μL per well, 0.75 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred (at 25°C) within an Al block (pre-mix array). After 30 minutes an equal equivalent of a second ligand was added to each well (ligand 2 - 0.75 μmol), and the resultant mixtures were stirrer for an additional 30 minutes. Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min, 25°C), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well, contact time of ca. 2 min, 25°C). Individual aliquots of the solutions contained within the pre-mix array were transferred to 15 mL tarred glass vials containing Teflon coated stir bars; 2.0 mL of styrene, 2.0 ml toluene and a group 13 scavenger (10 μmol). The vials were housed within a reactor, with its heater pre-set at 105°C temperature; and it stirrer set at 300 - 800 rpm. 2 - 25 minutes post addition of the catalyst solutions, the vials were removed from the reactor; placed into a RT Al block; and 3 mL of cold toluene was injected into each well. The 15 mL vials were then removed from the glove box and transferred to a fume hood to be quenched with 5 mL of methanol. Method 4: In-situ Complexation: 1 ligand species per well; 25°C complexation. 125°C reaction temperature; ca. 4 mL total volume per well: Procedure equivalent to Method 1 except: 1) reactor temperature equals 125°C; 2) and 2.0 mL ethylbenzene instead of 2.0 mL toluene as solvent within 15 mL vial. Method 5: In-situ Complexation; 1 ligand species per well; 75°C complexation, 125°C reaction temperature: ca. 4 mL total volume per well: Procedure equivalent to Method 2 except: 1) reactor temperature equals 125°C; 2) and 2.0 mL ethylbenzene instead of 2.0 mL toluene as solvent within 15 mL vial. Method 6: In-situ Complexation: 2 ligand species per well: 25°C complexation. 125°C reaction temperature: ca. 4 mL total volume per well: Procedure equivalent to Method 3 except: 1) reactor temperature equals 125°C; 2) and 2.0 mL ethylbenzene instead of 2.0 mL toluene as solvent within 15 mL vial. Method 7: In-situ Complexation: 2 ligand species per well: 25°C complexation, 125°C reaction temperature: ca. 4 mL total volume per well: The ligand array (0.75 μmol of each ligand 1 & 0.75 μmol of each ligand 2) was first contacted with toluene (ca. 100 μL per well) and then toluene solutions of the desired group IV precursor (50 μL per well, 0.75 μmol) were added. The resultant mixtures were stirred (at 25°C) within an Al block (pre-mix array). Individual vials were then treated with a stock solution of the appropriate group 13 reagent activator (30-60 μL per well, contact time of ca. 10 min, 25°C), followed by an activator (or activator mixture, 30 - 75 μL per well, contact time of ca. 2 min, 25°C). Individual aliquots of the solutions contained within the pre-mix array were transferred to 15 mL tarred glass vials containing Teflon coated stir bars; 2.0 mL of styrene, 2.0 ml toluene and a group 13 scavenger (10 μmol). The vials were housed within a reactor, with its heater pre-set at 105°C temperature; and it stirrer set at 300 - 800 rpm. 2 - 25 minutes post addition of the catalyst solutions, the vials were removed from the reactor; placed into a RT Al block; and 3 mL of cold toluene was injected into each well. The 15 mL vials were then removed from the glove box and transferred to a fume hood to be quenched with 5 mL of methanol. [00429] Section3Eiv: Product Analysis: Post methanol quench, the array was dried over-night in vacuo to remove the liquid phase, followed by 2 - 4 hour drying cycles within a vacuum oven set at 130°C. The vials were weighed via an automated weigh station, to constant weight. 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene (TCB) was added vials which met a minimum yield criteria, and the resulting TCB solutions were heated for 2 hours at 160°C. An aliquot of the hot solution was injected into a rapid HT-GPC in order to determine Mw and PDI. Table 3E present representative results from the styrene homopolymerization reactions performed in a 12- well format.
[00430] Section 3F: Slurry ethylene-1-octene copolymerizations [00431] Section 3Fi: Preparation of the slurry polymerization reactor: The slurry parallel pressure reactor is described in U.S. Patent 6,759,014, which is incorporated herein by reference. A pre-weighed glass vial insert and disposable stirring paddle were fitted to each reaction vessel of the reactor. The reactor was then closed, 0.200 niL of a 0.02 M solution of tri-«-octylaluminum (Sigma-Aldrich) ("TNOA") in heptane, 0.125 niL of 1-octene and 4 niL of heptane were injected into, each pressure reaction vessel through a valve. The temperature was then set to 85°C, the stirring speed was set to 800 rpm, and the mixture was exposed to 120 psi ethylene. In some cases hydrogen (as a mixture with nitrogen) was added; the amount added is noted in Table 3F. An ethylene pressure of 120 psi in the pressure cell and the temperature setting were maintained, using computer control, until the end of the polymerization experiment. [00432] Section 3Fii Preparation of supported catalyst S-M2: 12 mg of MAO supported on silica (4.5 mmol Al/g silica provided by Univation Technologies, "SMAO") was vortexed at 1200 rpm in 2.909 mL of dodecane (4 mg/mL slurry concentration). 91 μL of a 0.025 M toluene solution of catalyst M2 is added to the vortexing SMAO slurry and allowed to vortex at room temperature or 5O°C (support temperature noted in Table 3F) for approximately 2 hour before diluting with an additional 3 mL of dodecane (final slurry concentration: 2 mg/mL; catalyst loading: 19 umol/g). The diluted catalyst slurries were then vortexed at 1200 rpm at room temperature for 1 - 3 hours prior to injection into the pressure reactor vessel. [00433] Section 3Fiii Injection of supported catalyst slurries into the slurry pressure reactor vessel: Supported catalysts were vortexed at 1200 rpm throughout the experiment and during syringe aspiration prior to delivery of the catalyst to the reactor. A 90-100 uL buffer of heptane followed by 100-150 μL of the supported catalyst were injected into the pre-pressurized reaction vessel and were followed immediately by injection of heptane to increase the total volume injected to 0.600 mL. [00434] Section 3Fiv Polymerization: The polymerization reaction was allowed to continue for 300-600 seconds, during which time the temperature and pressure were maintained at their pre-set levels by computer control. The specific times for each polymerization are shown in Table 3F. The polymerization times were the lesser of the maximum desired polymerization time or the time taken for a predetermined amount of monomer gas to be consumed in the polymerization reaction. After the reaction time elapsed, the reaction was quenched by addition of an overpressure of carbon dioxide sent to the reactor.
[00435] Section 3Fv Product work up: After the polymerization reaction, the glass vial insert, containing the polymer product and solvent, was removed from the pressure cell and removed from the inert atmosphere dry box, and the volatile components were removed using a centrifuge vacuum evaporator. After most of the volatile components had evaporated, the vial contents were dried thoroughly by evaporation at elevated temperature under reduced pressure. The vial was then weighed to determine the yield of polymer product. The polymer product was then analyzed by Rapid GPC, to determine the molecular weight of the polymer produced, and by FTIR spectroscopy to determine the mole percent octene incorporated in the polymer as described above.
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000129_0001
[00436] Section 4. Synthesis of Phenol Heterocycle Complexes M1-M12
[00437] In the following sections, "Me" refers to methyl, "'Bu" refers to tert-butyl, "Bz" refers to benzyl, "Ar" refers to aromatic, "Ph" refers to phenyl, "An" refers to anthracenyl, "2,6Cl2Ph" refers to 2,6-dichloroρhenyl, "Cbz" refers to carbazole and "PT" refers to phenol thiazole. Unless otherwise noted, all manipulations were conducted under an atmosphere of dry, deoxygenated argon in a Vacuum Atmospheres or MBraun glovebox. MBz4 (M = Hf, Zr) were purchased from Strem Chemicals, Inc. in Newburyport, MA, U.S.A. Pentane and toluene were sparged with nitrogen and passed though columns of activated Al2O3 and CU-0226S (Engelhart; a commercially available oxygen scavenger). Anhydrous benzene-J6 was purchased from Cambridge Isotopes, degassed and stored over 4A molecular sieves under Ar. All other reagents were purchased from Aldrich in the highest available purity and used without further purification. [00438] NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker 300 MHz spectrometer.
1H chemical shifts were referenced relative to residual protio solvent peaks. Due to the large number of aromatic substituents and the complexity of the spectra in the 6.5-8.5 ppm region, the peaks corresponding to the hydrogens on the aromatic rings are generally not assigned and are denoted as "ArH" in the lists of NMR data. [00439] Complexes used in polymerization screening are shown below:
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000132_0001
[00440] Section 4A. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Hf Complex
[A13]2HfBz2 (Ml):
[00441] A toluene solution of HfBz4 (140 mg, 0.26 mmol, 3 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A13 (227 mg, 0.52 mmol, 15 niL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the resulting residue was washed with pentane and dried under vacuum, yielding a yellow solid product (303 mg, 94 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 8.0 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.55 (d, 4H, ArH), 7.42 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.34 (t, 4H, ArH), 7.21 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.8 - 6.7 (m, 8H, ArH), 6.53 (d/d, 2H, ArH), 6.45 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.22 9 (d/d, 2H, ArH), 6.05 (t, 2H, ArH), 2.47 (d, 2H, HfCH2), 2.31 (d, 2Η, HfCH2), 1.23 (s, 18Η, CMe3).
[00442] Section 4B. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Zr Complex
[A13]2ZrBz2 (M2):
[00443] A toluene solution OfZrBz4 (104 mg, 0.23 mmol, 4 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A13 (200 mg, 0.46 mmol, 12 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the resulting residue was washed with pentane and dried under vacuum (190 mg, 73%). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 8.18 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.56 (d, 4H, o- Ph), 7.50 - 7.28 (m, 6H, ArH), 7.20 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.7 - 6.5 (m, 8H5 ArH), 6.4 - 6.2 (m, 6H, ArH), 6.02 (t, 2H, p-Ph), 2.17 (d, 2H5 ZrCH2), 1.55 (d, 2H5 ZrCH2), 1.24 (s, 18H5 CMe3).
[00444] Section 4C. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Hf Complex
[A14]2HfBz2 (M3):
[00445] A toluene solution OfHfBz4 (24 mg, 0.044 mmol, 3mL) was added to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A14 (41 mg, 0.088mmol, 3mL). The mixture was stirred for 35 min at room temperature and the titled complex formed quantitatively as determined by 1H NMR. The volatiles were removed and a yellow solid product was obtained which was used for polymerization screening without further purification. 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 7.9 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.8 (s, 2H, ArH), 7.71 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.48 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.47 - 7.39 (m, ArH), 7.38 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.35 - 6.8 (m, 12H, ArH, partially overlap with solvent signal), 6.56 (m, 8H, ArH), 6.39 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.25 (d, 4H), 1.77 (d, 2H, HfCH2), 1.46 (d, 2Η, HfCH2), 1.37 (s, 18Η, CMe3).
[00446] Section 4D. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Zr Complex
[A14]2ZrBz2 (M4):
[00447] A C6D6 solution of ZrBz4 (10 mg, 0.022 mmol, ImL) was added to a C6D6 solution of phenol oxadiazole A14 (21 mg, 0.044 mmol, ImL). The mixture was stirred for ~ 4.5 h at room temperature and the titled complex formed quantitatively as determined by 1H NMR. The volatiles were removed and the solid product was washed with pentane and dried (12 mg, 45 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) 5 8.03 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.95 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.84 (s, 2H, ArH), 7.6 - 6.8 (m, ArH, partially overlap with solvent signal), 6.60 - 6.35 (m, 6H, ArH), 6.30 (d, 4H, ArH), 5.82 (d, 4H, ArH), 1.66 (d, 2H, ZrCH2), 1.37 (s, 18Η, CMe3), 0.92 (d, 2H, ZrCH2).
[00448] Section 4E. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Hf Complex
[A13][A14]HfBz2 (M5):
[00449] A benzene-d6 solution of phenol oxadiazole A14 (9.3 mg, 0.02 mmol, 0.5 mL) and a benzene-d6 solution of HfBz4 (10.9 mg, 0.02 mmol, 0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred briefly and a benzene-d6 solution of phenol oxadiazole A13 (8.9 mg, 0.02 mmol, 0.5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred for 10 min and the desired product [A13][A14]HfBz2 (M5) formed almost quantitatively as determined by 1H NMR. The reaction mixture was dried and the residue product was used for polymerization screening without further purification. 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 8.8 - 6 (m, ArH), 2.23 (d, 1H, HfCH2), 2.0 (d, 1H, HfCH2), 1.92 (d, 1Η, HfCH2), 1.78 (d, HfCH2), 1.30 (s, 9Η, CMe3), 1.28 (s, 9H, C Me3). (1287-17a-lH)
[00450] Section 4F. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Zr Complex
[A31]2ZrBz2 (M6):
[00451] A toluene solution OfZrBz4 (35 mg, 0.078 mmol, 2 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol oxadiazole A31 (82 mg, 0.155 mmol, 4 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated until almost to dryness and pentane (0.5 mL) was added. The mixture was stored at -35 C for 12 h and an orange solid product was obtained which was then washed with pentane and dried under vacuum. (78mg, 76 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, 50 °C) δ 8.22 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.99 (d, 4H, ArH), 7.45 (br s, 2H, ArH), 7.35 - 7.06 (m, ArH, partially overlap with solvent signal), 7.01 (t, 4H, ArH), 6.93 (d, 4H, ArH), 6.83 (d, 4H, ArH), 6.6 - 6.3 (m, 8H, ArH), 5.80 (d, 4H, ArH), 1.74 (br s, 4H, ZrCH2), 1.17 (s, 18Η, CMe3).
[00452] Section 4G. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Hf Complex
[A14]HfBz3 (M7):
[00453] A benzene-d6 solution of phenol oxadiazole A14 (16 mg, 0.035 mmol, 0.6 mL) was added to a benzene-d6 solution of HfBz4 (19.7 mg, 0.036 mmol, 0.6 mL). The titled complex formed quantitatively within 5 min as determined by 1H NMR. The volatiles were removed and the resulting product was used for polymerization without further purification. 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 8.21 (br s, 1H, ArH), 8.18 (d, 1H, ArH), 7.79 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.7 - 7.6 (m, 3H, ArH), 7.45 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.3 (t, 2H, ArH), 7.2 - 6.9 (m, ArH, partially overlap with solvent signal), 6.85 (t, 6H, m-Ph), 6.67 (t, 3H, p-Ph), 6.14 (d, 6H, o-Ph), 1.62 (s, 6H, HfCH2), 1.3 (s, 9Η, CMe3). [00454] Section 4H. Synthesis of Phenol Oxadiazole Hf Complex
[A13]HfBz3(M8):
[00455] A benzene-d6 solution of phenol oxadiazole A13 (14 mg, 0.032 mmoL, 0.6 niL) was added to a benzene-d6 solution of HfBz4 (18 mg, 0.032 mmol, 0.6 mL). The titled complex formed quantitatively within 5 min as determined by 1H NMR. The volatiles were removed and the resulting product was used for polymerization screening without further purification. 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 7.93 (d, 1H, ArH), 7.55 (d, 1H, ArH), 7.45 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.3 (t, 2H, ArH), 7.25 - 6.99 (m, ArH, partially overlap with solvent signal), 6.94 (t, 6H, m- Ph), 6.71 (d, 2H, ArH), 6.65 (t, p-Ph), 6.58 (d, 6H,o-Ph), 6.45 - 6.20 (m, 2H, ArH), 2.2 (s, 6H, HfCH2), 1.2 (s, 9Η, CMe3).
[00456] Section 41. Synthesis of Phenol Thiazole Hf Complex
[C14]2HfBz2 (M9):
[00457] A toluene solution of HfBz4 (120 mg, 0.22 mmol, 6 mL) was added drop wise to a toluene solution of phenol thiazole C14 (200 mg, 0.44 mmol, 8 mL). The mixture was stirred for 40 min at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the residue was washed with pentane and dried, yielding a yellow solid product (281 mg, 94 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 7.72 (d, 4H, ArH), 7.65 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.5 - 7.3 (m, 6H, ArH), 7.21 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.9 - 6.7 (m, 8H, ArH), 6.63 (d/d, 2H, ArH), 6.55 - 6.40 (m, 4H, ArH), 6.17 (t, 2Α,p-Ph), 6.02 (s, 2H, thiazole), 2.62 (d, 2H, HfCH2), 2.52 (d, HfCH2), 1.36 (s, 18Η, CMe3).
[00458] Section 4J. Synthesis of Phenol Thiazole Zr Complex
[C14]2ZrBz2 (MlO):
[00459] A toluene solution OfZrBz4 (103 mg, 0.23 mmol, 6 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol thiazole C14 (206 mg, 0.45 mmol, 8 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed to almost dryness and pentane was added. The mixture was kept at -35 °C for Ih, an orange solid product was collected and dried (265 mg, 99 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 7.78 (d, 4H, ArH), 7.72 (d, 2H, ArH), 7.45 - 7.33 (m, 6H, ArH), 7.22 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.8 - 6.4 (m, 14H, ArH), 6.17 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.07 (s, 2H, thiazole), 2.63 (d, 2H, ZrCH2), 2.53 (2Η, ZxCH2), 1.36 (s, 18H, CMe3).
[00460] Section 4K. Synthesis of Phenol Thiazole Hf Complex
[C23]2HfBz2 (Mil):
[00461] A toluene solution of HfBz4 (37 mg, 0.069 mmol, 1.5 niL) was added dropwise to a toluene slurry of phenol thiazole C23 (57 mg, 0.14 mmol, 1.5 mL). The mixture was stirred for 50 min at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the residue was washed with pentane and dried, yellow solid product was obtained (67 mg, 83 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 7.67 (d, 4H, ArH), 7.38 (t + d, 6H, ArH), 7.20 (t, 2H, ArH), 7.06 (d, 2H, ArH), 6.95 - 6.75 (m, 8H, ArH), 6.65 - 6.40 (m, 6H, ArH), 6.16 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.03 (s, 2H, 2 thiazole), 2.63 (d, 2H, HfCH2), 2.46 (d, 2Η, HfCH2), 2.18 (s, 6Η, ArMe).
[00462] Section 4L. Synthesis of Phenol Thiazole Zr Complex
[C23]2ZrBz2 (M12):
[00463] A toluene solution OfZrBz4 (25 mg, 0.054 mmol, 1 mL) was added dropwise to a toluene solution of phenol thiazole C23 (44 mg, 0.11 mmol, 1.4 mL). The mixture was stirred for Ih at room temperature. The volatiles were removed and the residue was washed with pentane and dried, light orange solid product was collected (49 mg, 83 %). 1H NMR (C6D6, RT) δ 7.71 (d, 4H, ArH), 7.44 (br s, 2H, ArH), 7.38 (t, 4H, ArH), 7.21 (t, 2H, ArH), 7.06 (d, 2H, ArH), 6.82 (t, 4H, ArH), 6.7 (d, 4H, ArH), 6.68 - 6.40 (m, 6H), 6.15 (t, 2H, ArH), 6.08 (s, 2H, thiazole), 2.63 (d/d, 4H, ZrCH2), 2.18 (s, 6Η, AiMe).
[00464] Although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments, persons skilled in the art will recognize that changes may be made in form and detail without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A metal ligand complex characterized by a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000138_0001
wherein each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms; X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)n» or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n"' or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; x is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
2. The compound of claim 1 , where the a metal ligand complex characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000139_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R , R and R may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms; X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)n- or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7V" or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; provided combinations of X1, X2; and X1, X4 are not both N and X1, X2 and X3 are not all N; further provided where X1, X3, X4 are each N, X2 is C, R5 is H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, - Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3, and when R1 is F, R3 is F, X1, X2, X3 are all C, X4 is N, R5, R6 are each H and R7 is t-butyl are not included; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; x is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein the metal ligand complex is characterized by a formula selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000141_0001
4. The compound of either of claims 1, 2 or 3, wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl.
5. The compound of either of claims 1, 2, 3 or 4, wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl.
6. The compound of claim 5, wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, N-carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
7. The compound of claims 1 , 2 or 3, wherein x is 2 and wherein each of the two ligands within the square brackets is identical to the other or different from each other.
8. A metal-ligand complex that is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000142_0001
wherein each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 on the same ring in the formula may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms;
X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n> or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)n- or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n>» or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n"' are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic;
X5 is N or C, X6 is O, S, N(R5V or CR5, X7 is O, S, N(R6)n» or CR6, X8 is O, S, N(R7)n"> or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n"' are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; further provided that the atoms in the X1, X2, X3, X4, N ring are different from the atoms in the X5, X6, X7, X8, N ring in the selection of the C, N, O or S atom, such that at least, either X1 and X5 are different or X2 and X6 are different or X3 and X7 are different or X4 and X8 are different; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; and m" is θ, 1, 2, or 3.
9. The compound of claim 8, where the compound is of the formula:
Figure imgf000143_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, X1, X2, X3, and X4, are defined above and R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, and optionally two or more of R8, R9, R10 and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms.
10. The metal ligand complex of claim 1 , wherein the metal complex is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000144_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R8, R9, R10 and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms;
X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5V or CR5, wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic, provided X1 and X2 are not both N; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table of elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; x is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and m" is θ, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
11. The complex of claim 10, wherein the complex is characterized by a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000145_0001
12. The complex of either of claims 10 or 11, wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl.
13. The complex of claims 10 or 11 , wherein x is 2 and wherein each of the two ligands within the square brackets is identical to or different from the other.
14. The complex of claims 10 or 11, wherein x is 1, additionally comprising a second phenol-heterocycle ligands are different from the ligand within the square brackets.
15. The complex of claim 1 , wherein the metal complex is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000146_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms;
X1 is N or C, X2 is N or CR5, X3 is N or CR6, X4 is N or CR7, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; provided that compounds when X1, X2, X3 and X4 are each C, R5, R6 and R7 are each H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, - CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3, are not included; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table of elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; x is 1 or 2; and m" is θ, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
16. The complex of claim 1 , wherein the metal complex is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000147_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R8, R9, R10 and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms;
X is C, X is N or CR , provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; wherein M is a metal selected from the group consisting of groups 3 through 6 of the periodic table of elements and lanthanides; wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof; x is 1 or 2; and m" is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
17. A compound characterized a formula selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000148_0001
wherein each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms;
X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n' or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)n" or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n'" or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; provided combinations of X1, X2; X1, X3; and X 1, X4 are not both N and X1, X2 and X3 are not all N; and further provided compounds where X1, X3, X4 are each N, X2 is C, R5 is H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, - Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3; and when R1 is F, R3 is F, X1, X2, X3 are all C, X4 is N, R5, R6 are each H and R7 is t-butyl are not included.
18. A composition comprising a compound characterized by claim 17 and a metal precursor or activated metal precursor.
19. The composition of claim 18, wherein: a) the compound is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000149_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R5, R6 and R7 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms;
X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5)n, or CR5, X3 is O, S, N(R6)' or CR6, X4 is O, S, N(R7)n"' or CR7, wherein each n', n", and n'" are each independently 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; provided combinations of X1, X2; X1, X3; and X1, X4 are not both N and X1, X2 and X3 are not all N; and further provided compounds where X1, X3, X4 are each N, X2 is C, R5 is H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, - C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and -Si(Ph)3; and when R1 is F, R3 is F, X1, X2, X3 are all C, X4 is N, R5, R6 are each H and R7 is t-butyl are not included; and b) the metal precursor characterized by the general formula M(L)n where M is a metal selected from groups 3-6 of the periodic table of elements and lanthanide elements of the periodic table of elements, each L is a moiety that forms a covalent, dative or ionic bond with M; and ή is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
20. The composition of claim 19, wherein the compound in part a) is characterized by a formula selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000150_0001
Figure imgf000151_0001
21. The composition of either of claims 19 or 20, wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl.
22. The composition of either of claims 19, 20 or 21, wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl.
23. The composition of either of claims 19, 20, 21, or 22, wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of /-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naphthyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl and R7 is selected from the group consisting of substituted phenyl and anthracenyl.
24. The composition of either of claims 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23, wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, tliioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, arylthio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof, and Lewis base adducts thereof.
25. The composition of either of claims 19, 20, 21 , 22, 23 or 24,. wherein the ratio of ligand compound to the metal precursoris about two equivalents to one equivalent, and wherein the about two ligand equivalents are the same ligand.
26. The composition of either of claims 19, 20, 21 , 22, 23 or 24, wherein the ratio of compound to the metal precursor is about two equivalents to one equivalent, and wherein the about two ligand equivalents comprises a first phenol-heterocycle ligand and a second phenol-heterocycle ligand, with the first and second phenol-heterocycle ligands being different from each other.
27. The composition of claim 18, wherein: a) the compound is characterized by the general formula:
Figure imgf000152_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R8, R9, R10, and R11 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, halo, silyl, boryl, phosphino, amino, thioalkyl, thioaryl, nitro, and combinations thereof, with the exception that R1 may not be hydrogen, optionally two or more of R1, R2, R3 and R4 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms, and optionally two or more of R8, R9, R10 and R11 may be joined to form a fused ring system having up to 50 atoms, not counting hydrogen atoms; and X1 is N or C, X2 is O, S, N(R5V or CR5, wherein n' is 0 or 1, provided that the heteroatom containing ring system is heteroaromatic; and provided X1 and X2 are not both N.; and b) the metal precursor is characterized by the general formula M(L)n where M is a metal selected from groups 3-6 of the periodic table of elements and lanthanide elements of the periodic table of elements, each L is a moiety that forms a covalent, dative or ionic bond with M; and n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
28. The composition of claim 27, wherein the compound in part a) is characterized by a formula selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000153_0001
29. The composition of either of claims 27 or 28, wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, naphthyl, substituted naplithyl, carbazolyl, substituted carbazolyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl.
30. The composition of any of claims 27, 28 or 29, wherein each L is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, allyl, diene, alkenyl, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, boryl, silyl, amino, phosphino, ether, thioether, phosphine, amine, carboxylate, alkylthio, aryltliio, 1,3-dionate, oxalate, carbonate, nitrate, sulphate, and combinations thereof, and Lewis base adducts thereof.
31. The composition of any of claims 27, 28, 29 or 30, wherein the ratio of ligand compound to the metal precursor is about two equivalents to one equivalent and wherein the about two ligand equivalents are the same ligand.
32. The composition of any of claims 27, 28, 29 or 30, wherein the ratio of ligand compound to the metal precursor is about two equivalents to one equivalent and wherein the about two ligand equivalents comprises a first phenol-heterocycle ligand and a second phenol-heterocycle ligand, with the first and second phenol-heterocycle ligands being different from each other.
33. The composition or complex of any of the above claims, wherein M is either Zr, Hf or Ti.
34. A catalyst formed from the composition or complex of any of the above claims and an activator, combination of activators or an activating technique.
35. A polymerization process comprising subjecting one or more monomers to polymerization conditions in the presence of a catalyst comprising the composition or complex of any of the above claims and an activator, combination of activators or an activating technique.
36. The process of claim 35, wherein the process is a copolymerization of ethylene and one or more alpha-olefms.
„ 37. The process of claim 35, wherein the one or more monomers is selected from the group consisting of ethylene, propylene, 1-butene, 1-hexene, 1-octene, 1- decene, styrene and combinations thereof.
38. The process of claim 35, wherein the process is a solution polymerization process conducted at a temperature greater than or equal to 100°C.
39. The process of claim 35, wherein the one or more monomers is a vinylidene aromatic monomer.
40. The composition or complex of any of the above claims provided that combinations of X1, X2; X1, X3; and X1, X4 are not both N and X1, X2 and X3 are not all N; and/or provided where X1, X3, X4 are each N, X2 is C, R5 is H and R1 is selected from the group consisting of /-butyl, -CMe2Et, -C(Et)3, -CMe2Ph, -C(Ph)3, -Si(Et)3, and - Si(Ph)3, and when R1 is F, R3 is F, X1, X2, X3 are all C, X4 is N, R5, R6 are each H and R7 is t-butyl are not included.
PCT/US2005/045766 2004-12-16 2005-12-16 Phenol-heterocyclic ligands, metal complexes, and their uses as catalysts WO2006066126A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US63655504P 2004-12-16 2004-12-16
US60/636,555 2004-12-16

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2006066126A2 true WO2006066126A2 (en) 2006-06-22
WO2006066126A3 WO2006066126A3 (en) 2006-08-24

Family

ID=36282632

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2005/045766 WO2006066126A2 (en) 2004-12-16 2005-12-16 Phenol-heterocyclic ligands, metal complexes, and their uses as catalysts

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US7705157B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2006066126A2 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008076589A1 (en) 2006-12-20 2008-06-26 Exxonmobil Chemical Patents Inc. Phase separator and monomer recycle for supercritical polymerization process
US7834039B2 (en) 2006-12-15 2010-11-16 Abbott Laboratories Oxadiazole compounds
WO2010132811A1 (en) * 2009-05-14 2010-11-18 Univation Technologies, Llc Mixed metal catalyst systems having a tailored hydrogen response
JP2021522243A (en) * 2018-04-26 2021-08-30 エクソンモービル ケミカル パテンツ インコーポレイテッド Non-coordinating anion-type activator containing a cation having a long-chain alkyl group
WO2021242801A1 (en) 2020-05-29 2021-12-02 Dow Global Technologies Llc Attenuated hybrid catalysts
WO2021242800A1 (en) 2020-05-29 2021-12-02 Dow Global Technologies Llc Attenuated post-metallocene catalysts

Families Citing this family (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008059024A1 (en) * 2006-11-15 2008-05-22 High Point Pharmaceuticals, Llc 2- ( 2 -hydroxyphenyl) -quinazolin-4-ones useful for treating obesity and diabetes
WO2008059026A1 (en) * 2006-11-15 2008-05-22 High Point Pharmaceuticals, Llc Novel 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzimidazoles useful for treating obesity and diabetes
US7939690B2 (en) * 2006-11-15 2011-05-10 High Point Pharmaceuticals, Llc Haloalkylsulfone substituted compounds useful for treating obesity and diabetes
EP2086951B1 (en) * 2006-11-15 2011-12-21 High Point Pharmaceuticals, LLC Novel 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl) benzothiadiazines useful for treating obesity and diabetes
US8431660B2 (en) * 2007-12-05 2013-04-30 Lg Chem, Ltd. Non-metallocene catalysts having tetrazol group for olefin polymerization and polymerizing method of olefin using the same
US20090286944A1 (en) * 2008-05-15 2009-11-19 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Select phenol-heterocycle ligands, metal complexes formed therefrom, and their uses as catalysts
US8637618B2 (en) * 2008-12-31 2014-01-28 Symyx Solutions, Inc. Method for producing very-high or ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene
JP5709389B2 (en) 2009-03-20 2015-04-30 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Oxadiazole derivative, light-emitting element, light-emitting device, and electronic device
JP5539687B2 (en) * 2009-09-10 2014-07-02 東レ・ダウコーニング株式会社 Method for producing alkyl-modified polydimethylsiloxane purified product, cosmetic raw material containing the purified product, and cosmetic
US8530593B2 (en) 2009-10-28 2013-09-10 Exxonmobil Chemical Patents Inc. Catalyst compounds and use thereof
EP2493933A4 (en) * 2009-10-28 2013-06-12 Exxonmobil Chem Patents Inc Catalyst compounds and use thereof
EP2493935A4 (en) * 2009-10-28 2013-06-26 Exxonmobil Chem Patents Inc Catalyst compounds and use thereof
CN102666597A (en) * 2009-10-28 2012-09-12 埃克森美孚化学专利公司 Catalyst compounds and use thereof
WO2011056423A2 (en) * 2009-10-28 2011-05-12 Exxonmobil Chemical Patents Inc. Catalyst compounds and use thereof
EP2753655B1 (en) 2011-09-07 2019-12-04 Dow Silicones Corporation Titanium containing complex and condensation reaction catalysts, methods for preparing the catalysts, and compositions containing the catalysts
US9228061B2 (en) 2011-09-07 2016-01-05 Dow Corning Corporation Zirconium containing complex and condensation reaction catalysts, methods for preparing the catalysts, and compositions containing the catalysts
US9139699B2 (en) 2012-10-04 2015-09-22 Dow Corning Corporation Metal containing condensation reaction catalysts, methods for preparing the catalysts, and compositions containing the catalysts
CN111362885A (en) * 2020-03-06 2020-07-03 华东理工大学 Benzothiazole ring substituted aminophenol oxygen radical zinc complex and preparation method and application thereof
RU2748114C1 (en) * 2020-09-11 2021-05-19 Публичное акционерное общество "Нефтяная компания "Роснефть" (ПАО "НК "Роснефть") Method of producing a {2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-[(tert-butylimino)methyl]phenolate} pre-catalyst for vanadium(v) oxodichloride for the synthesis of epdm/epm ethylene-propylene rubbers

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000030864A (en) * 1998-07-14 2000-01-28 Minolta Co Ltd Organic electroluminescence element
WO2000037512A2 (en) * 1998-12-18 2000-06-29 Univation Technologies, Llc Olefin polymerization catalysts, their production and use
JP2001271063A (en) * 2000-03-27 2001-10-02 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Material for organic electroluminescent device and organic electroluminescent device using the same material
WO2002006358A1 (en) * 2000-07-17 2002-01-24 Univation Technologies, Llc A catalyst system and its use in a polymerization process
WO2002046250A2 (en) * 2000-12-04 2002-06-13 Univation Technologies, Llc Catalyst composition, method of polymerization and polymer therefrom
US20030165711A1 (en) * 1998-06-23 2003-09-04 Youngkyoo Kim Novel organometallic luminescent materials and organic electroluminescent device containing same
WO2006036748A2 (en) * 2004-09-22 2006-04-06 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Heterocycle-amine ligands, compositions, complexes, and catalysts, and methods of making and using the same

Family Cites Families (53)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4297465A (en) 1980-10-29 1981-10-27 Eastman Kodak Company Catalysts for polymerizing propylene in a high temperature solution process
IL85097A (en) 1987-01-30 1992-02-16 Exxon Chemical Patents Inc Catalysts based on derivatives of a bis(cyclopentadienyl)group ivb metal compound,their preparation and their use in polymerization processes
US5384299A (en) 1987-01-30 1995-01-24 Exxon Chemical Patents Inc. Ionic metallocene catalyst compositions
US5153157A (en) 1987-01-30 1992-10-06 Exxon Chemical Patents Inc. Catalyst system of enhanced productivity
ZA882999B (en) 1987-05-04 1988-11-01 Shell Oil Company Preparation of olefin polymerization catalyst component
US5093415A (en) 1987-05-19 1992-03-03 Union Carbide Chemicals & Plastics Technology Corporation Process for producing stereoregular polymers having a narrow molecular weight distribution
US4971936A (en) 1989-07-10 1990-11-20 Shell Oil Company Catalyst component for making primarily isotactic elastomeric polypropylene or polybutene
US5064802A (en) 1989-09-14 1991-11-12 The Dow Chemical Company Metal complex compounds
ATE135358T1 (en) 1990-12-27 1996-03-15 Exxon Chemical Patents Inc TRANSITION METAL AMIDE COMPOUND AND CATALYST SYSTEM FOR PRODUCING ISOTACTIC PROPYLENE
JPH04272907A (en) 1991-02-27 1992-09-29 Mitsubishi Petrochem Co Ltd Production of olefin polymer
DE69232297T2 (en) 1992-01-06 2002-08-14 Dow Chemical Co catalyst composition
CA2121721C (en) 1993-04-29 2004-11-23 Giampiero Morini Crystalline propylene polymers having high melt flow rate values and a narrow molecular weight distribution
TW354792B (en) 1993-08-13 1999-03-21 Mitsui Petrochemical Ind Olefin polymerization catalyst and process for preparing polypropylene and propylene block copolymer
US5616664A (en) 1994-08-02 1997-04-01 The Dow Chemical Company Polymerization process with biscyclopentadienyl diene complex containing catalysts
US6030917A (en) 1996-07-23 2000-02-29 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Combinatorial synthesis and analysis of organometallic compounds and catalysts
US5985356A (en) 1994-10-18 1999-11-16 The Regents Of The University Of California Combinatorial synthesis of novel materials
US5637660A (en) 1995-04-17 1997-06-10 Lyondell Petrochemical Company Polymerization of α-olefins with transition metal catalysts based on bidentate ligands containing pyridine or quinoline moiety
JP3653825B2 (en) * 1995-10-23 2005-06-02 東洋インキ製造株式会社 Organic electroluminescent device material and organic electroluminescent device using the same
WO1998003521A1 (en) 1996-07-23 1998-01-29 Symyx Technologies Combinatorial synthesis and analysis of organometallic compounds and catalysts
US6720186B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2004-04-13 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Method of research for creating and testing novel catalysts, reactions and polymers
TWI246520B (en) 1997-04-25 2006-01-01 Mitsui Chemicals Inc Processes for olefin polymerization
IL122115A (en) 1997-07-27 2007-06-17 Technion Res & Dev Foundation Process for polymerizing alpha-olefins and polymers, copolymers and elastomers prepared thereby
DE69812106T2 (en) 1997-08-01 2003-12-18 Dow Global Technologies Inc catalyst activator
AU9262498A (en) 1997-09-03 1999-03-22 Montell Technology Company B.V. Components and catalysts for the polymerization of olefins
PL342450A1 (en) 1998-02-20 2001-06-04 Dow Chemical Co Catalyst activators containing expanded anions
US6410660B1 (en) 1998-03-27 2002-06-25 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Polymerization of olefins
US6294388B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2001-09-25 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Indirect calibration of polymer characterization systems
US6260407B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2001-07-17 Symyx Technologies, Inc. High-temperature characterization of polymers
US6406632B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2002-06-18 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Rapid characterization of polymers
US6175409B1 (en) 1999-04-02 2001-01-16 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Flow-injection analysis and variable-flow light-scattering methods and apparatus for characterizing polymers
KR100342541B1 (en) 1998-04-16 2002-06-28 나까니시 히로유끼 Olefin polymerization catalyst and polymerization process
US6455316B1 (en) 1998-08-13 2002-09-24 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Parallel reactor with internal sensing and method of using same
US6759014B2 (en) 2001-01-26 2004-07-06 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and methods for parallel processing of multiple reaction mixtures
US6306658B1 (en) 1998-08-13 2001-10-23 Symyx Technologies Parallel reactor with internal sensing
ATE213851T1 (en) 1998-10-19 2002-03-15 Symyx Technologies Inc DESIGNING COMBINATORIAL MATERIAL LIBRARIES
JP4221129B2 (en) * 1999-02-15 2009-02-12 富士フイルム株式会社 Nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound, organic light emitting device material, organic light emitting device
JP4045684B2 (en) * 1999-03-01 2008-02-13 コニカミノルタホールディングス株式会社 Organic electroluminescence device
US6296771B1 (en) 1999-04-02 2001-10-02 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Parallel high-performance liquid chromatography with serial injection
US6436292B1 (en) 1999-04-02 2002-08-20 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Parallel high-performance liquid chromatography with post-separation treatment
US6507945B1 (en) 1999-05-05 2003-01-14 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Synthesizing combinatorial libraries of materials
JP2001040346A (en) * 1999-07-30 2001-02-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Luminescent element material and luminescent element using same
JP3938263B2 (en) * 1999-11-09 2007-06-27 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 Method for producing metal complex
US7078164B1 (en) 2000-06-19 2006-07-18 Symyx Technologies, Inc. High throughput screen for identifying polymerization catalysts from potential catalysts
US7018589B1 (en) 2000-07-19 2006-03-28 Symyx Technologies, Inc. High pressure parallel reactor
AU2002225662A1 (en) 2000-11-07 2002-05-21 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Substituted pyridyl amine ligands, complexes and catalysts therefrom; processes for producing polyolefins therewith
GB0028317D0 (en) * 2000-11-21 2001-01-03 South Bank Univ Entpr Ltd Electroluminescent device incorporating polyaniline
JP3949391B2 (en) * 2001-05-14 2007-07-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Light emitting element
JP2005508415A (en) 2001-11-06 2005-03-31 ダウ グローバル テクノロジーズ インコーポレイティド Isotactic propylene copolymers, their production and use
DE60305473T2 (en) * 2002-04-12 2006-11-30 Dow Global Technologies, Inc., Midland COPOLYMERS WITH LOW MOLECULAR WEIGHT OF ETHYLENE AND VINYLAROMATIC MONOMERS AND APPLICATIONS THEREOF
US6794514B2 (en) * 2002-04-12 2004-09-21 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Ethylene-styrene copolymers and phenol-triazole type complexes, catalysts, and processes for polymerizing
JP4371305B2 (en) 2002-04-24 2009-11-25 シミックス・ソルーションズ・インコーポレーテッド Cross-linked bis-aromatic ligands, complexes, catalysts, or polymerization methods and polymers obtained thereby
US7160513B2 (en) 2002-12-20 2007-01-09 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Batch reactor with injection system
DE10309837A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2004-09-16 Basf Ag Catalysts for the polymerization of styrene

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030165711A1 (en) * 1998-06-23 2003-09-04 Youngkyoo Kim Novel organometallic luminescent materials and organic electroluminescent device containing same
JP2000030864A (en) * 1998-07-14 2000-01-28 Minolta Co Ltd Organic electroluminescence element
WO2000037512A2 (en) * 1998-12-18 2000-06-29 Univation Technologies, Llc Olefin polymerization catalysts, their production and use
JP2001271063A (en) * 2000-03-27 2001-10-02 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Material for organic electroluminescent device and organic electroluminescent device using the same material
WO2002006358A1 (en) * 2000-07-17 2002-01-24 Univation Technologies, Llc A catalyst system and its use in a polymerization process
WO2002046250A2 (en) * 2000-12-04 2002-06-13 Univation Technologies, Llc Catalyst composition, method of polymerization and polymer therefrom
WO2006036748A2 (en) * 2004-09-22 2006-04-06 Symyx Technologies, Inc. Heterocycle-amine ligands, compositions, complexes, and catalysts, and methods of making and using the same

Non-Patent Citations (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ANTHONY K ET AL: "Solid-state fluorescent photophysics of some 2-substituted benzothiazoles" JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, PERKIN TRANSACTIONS 2, no. 12, 1984, pages 2111-2117, XP009011528 ISSN: 1472-779X *
BACH T ET AL: "Synthesis of 2-(o-hydroxyaryl)-4-arylthiazoles by regioselective Pd(0)-catalyzed cross-coupling" TETRAHEDRON LETTERS, vol. 41, no. 11, March 2000 (2000-03), pages 1707-1710, XP004202254 ISSN: 0040-4039 *
BEHER J ET AL: "O- und N-alkylsubstituierte 2-(2'-hydroxyphenyl)- benzimidazole und -1,3,4-oxadiazole als Komplexbildner und Extractionsmittel f}r Kupfer-II-ionen - O- and N-alkyl substituted 2-(2'-hydroxyphenyl)- benzimidazoles and -1,3,4-oxadiazoles and their use as complexants and extractants for copper(II) ions" JOURNAL F]R PRAKTISCHE CHEMIE, vol. 325, no. 5, 1983, pages 708-718, XP009066580 *
BENISVY L ET AL: "A phenol-imidazole pro-ligand that can exist as a phenoxyl radical, alone and when complexed to copper (II) and zinc (II)" DALTON TRANSACTIONS, no. 10, 2003, pages 1975-1985, XP002382183 *
CALHORDA M J ET AL: "Bis(eta-cyclopentadienyl)molybdenum (and -tungsten or -titanium) complexes with chelate imidazole derivatives and realted ligands" JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, DALTON TRANSACTIONS, no. 8, 1980, pages 1443-1447, XP009066562 ISSN: 0300-9246 *
CARVALHO C ET AL: "Excited-state acidity of bifunctional compounds. Part 5. 5-(2- hydroxyphenyl)-3-phenyl-1,2,4-oxadiazole and 3-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-5-phenyl-1,2,4- oxadiazole" JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, FARADAY TRANSACTIONS, vol. 93, no. 18, 21 September 1997 (1997-09-21), pages 3325-3329, XP000697790 ISSN: 0956-5000 *
COOK A H ET AL: "Experiments in the triazine and the glyoxaline series" JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, 1941, pages 278-282, XP009017853 ISSN: 0368-1769 *
COUSIN ET AL: "Sur les nitriles salicyliques - Salicic nitriles" BULLETIN DE LA SOCIETE CHIMIQUE DE FRANCE, vol. 4, no. 15, 1914, pages 414-421, XP009066572 *
COZZI P G ET AL: "Oxazoline early transition metal complexes: functionalisable achiral titanium(IV), titanium(III), zirconium(IV), vanadium(III) and chiral zriconium (IV) bis(oxazoline) complexes" INORGANIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 34, no. 11, 24 May 1995 (1995-05-24), pages 2921-2930, XP002382175 ISSN: 0022-1669 *
COZZI P G ET AL: "(Hydroxyphenyl)oxazoline: a novel and remarkably facile entry into the area of chiral cationic alkylzirconium complexes which serve as polymerization catalysts" ORGANOMETALLICS, vol. 14, no. 11, 1995, pages 4994-4996, XP000909157 ISSN: 0276-7333 *
COZZI P G ET AL: "Bis(hydroxyphenyloxazolinato)-titanium(IV ) and -zirconium(IV) triflates as novel transition metal-base Lewis acids" JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, PERKIN TRANSACTIONS 1, no. 20, 1995, pages 2557-2563, XP009066567 *
DELIWALA C V ET AL: "Chemotherapy of tuberculosis. Part III. Preparation of 5:5'dichlorosalicil and heterocyclic derivatives from dichlorosalicil and related alpha-diketones" PROCEEDINGS OF THE INDIAN ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, SECTION A, vol. 31, 1950, pages 107-116, XP009066816 *
FUKATA G ET AL: "Cyclodienones. 9. Reaction of 4-halo-2,4,6-tri-tert-butyl-2,5-cyclohexad ien-1-ones with pyrazoles and preparation of 1-(2-hydroxyphenyl)- and 1-(4-hydroxyphenyl)pyrazoles" HETEROCYCLES, vol. 19, no. 8, 1982, pages 1487-1495, XP009066593 *
MAURYA M R ET AL: "Oxo, dioxo and oxoperoxo complexes of molybdenum and tungsten with 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzimidazole" JOURNAL OF CHEMICAL RESEARCH (SYNOPSES), no. 8, 1996, pages 390-391, XP009066565 *
MISHRA A ET AL: "Rare earth complexes with N,O-donor ligands - part I. Nitrato-complexes of terpositive yttrium and lighter lanthanides with 2-(2'-hydroxyphenyl) benzimidazole" JOURNAL OF THE INDIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, vol. 57, no. 3, March 1980 (1980-03), pages 249-251, XP009066564 ISSN: 0019-4522 *
MISHRA A ET AL: "Rare earth complexes with N,O-donor ligands - part II. Complexes of Gd(III), Tb(III), Dy(III) and Ho(III) with 2-(2'-hydroxyphenyl) benzimidazole" JOURNAL OF THE INDIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, vol. 58, no. 12, December 1981 (1981-12), pages 1197-1198, XP009066563 ISSN: 0019-4522 *
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN vol. 2000, no. 04, 31 August 2000 (2000-08-31) -& JP 2000 030864 A (MINOLTA CO LTD), 28 January 2000 (2000-01-28) *
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN vol. 2002, no. 02, 2 April 2002 (2002-04-02) -& JP 2001 271063 A (TOYO INK MFG CO LTD), 2 October 2001 (2001-10-02) *
PLA-DALMAU A: "2-(2'-hydroxyphenyl)benzothiazoles, -benzoxazoles, and -benzimidazoles for plastic scintillation applications" JOURNAL OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 60, no. 17, 25 September 1995 (1995-09-25), pages 5468-5473, XP002382177 ISSN: 0022-3263 *
RYABUKHIN Y A ET AL: "Synthesis of bis(o-hydroxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazines, 1,2,4-triazoles, and oxadiazole by recyclisation of the o-hydroxyphenyl-4-oxo-1,3-benzoxazinium cation" CHEMISTRY OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS, vol. 19, no. 3, 1983, pages 332-336, XP009066578 ISSN: 0009-3122 *
RYABUKHIN Y I ET AL: "Synthesis and study of the structure of o-hydroxy-1,2,4-oxadiazoles" CHEMISTRY OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS, vol. 28, no. 4, 1992, pages 454-463, XP009066577 *
WEIDNER-WELLS M A ET AL: "Amidino benzimidazole inhibitors of bacterial two-component systems." BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, vol. 11, no. 12, 18 June 2001 (2001-06-18), pages 1545-1548, XP002382176 ISSN: 0960-894X *

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7834039B2 (en) 2006-12-15 2010-11-16 Abbott Laboratories Oxadiazole compounds
WO2008076589A1 (en) 2006-12-20 2008-06-26 Exxonmobil Chemical Patents Inc. Phase separator and monomer recycle for supercritical polymerization process
WO2010132811A1 (en) * 2009-05-14 2010-11-18 Univation Technologies, Llc Mixed metal catalyst systems having a tailored hydrogen response
CN102414228A (en) * 2009-05-14 2012-04-11 尤尼威蒂恩技术有限责任公司 Mixed metal catalyst systems having a tailored hydrogen response
US8435914B2 (en) 2009-05-14 2013-05-07 Univation Technologies, Llc Mixed metal catalyst systems having a tailored hydrogen response
CN102414228B (en) * 2009-05-14 2014-05-07 尤尼威蒂恩技术有限责任公司 Mixed metal catalyst systems having a tailored hydrogen response
JP2021522243A (en) * 2018-04-26 2021-08-30 エクソンモービル ケミカル パテンツ インコーポレイテッド Non-coordinating anion-type activator containing a cation having a long-chain alkyl group
US11414436B2 (en) 2018-04-26 2022-08-16 Exxonmobil Chemical Patents Inc. Non-coordinating anion type activators containing cation having large alkyl groups
WO2021242801A1 (en) 2020-05-29 2021-12-02 Dow Global Technologies Llc Attenuated hybrid catalysts
WO2021242800A1 (en) 2020-05-29 2021-12-02 Dow Global Technologies Llc Attenuated post-metallocene catalysts

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7705157B2 (en) 2010-04-27
WO2006066126A3 (en) 2006-08-24
US20100048841A1 (en) 2010-02-25
US20060135713A1 (en) 2006-06-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7705157B2 (en) Phenol-heterocyclic ligands, metal complexes, and their uses as catalysts
US10815318B2 (en) Quinolinyldiamido transition metal complexes, production and use thereof
EP1751169B1 (en) Bridged bi-aromatic catalysts, complexes, and method of using the same
US7157400B2 (en) Titanium substituted pyridyl amine complexes, catalysts and processes for polymerizing ethylene and stryene
EP2310399B1 (en) Pyridyldiamido transition metal complexes, production and use thereof
US6727361B2 (en) Phosphino substituted pyridine amine ligands
US20060025548A1 (en) Bridged bi-aromatic catalysts, complexes, and methods of using the same
EP2359930A1 (en) A polymer prepared in the presence of metal complexes bearing a polydentate heteroatom ligand
WO2018005201A1 (en) Quinolinyldiamido transition metal complexes, production and use thereof
WO2007076231A2 (en) Bridged phenol-heterocyclic ligands, metal complexes, and their uses as catalysts
WO2003087177A2 (en) Ethylene-styrene copolymers, complexes and catalysts with phenol-triazole ligands and processes for polymerizing therewith
US20090286944A1 (en) Select phenol-heterocycle ligands, metal complexes formed therefrom, and their uses as catalysts
US20020049288A1 (en) Ether-amine based polymerization catalysts, compositions and processes using same
EP3478694B1 (en) Quinolinyldiamido transition metal complexes, production and use thereof
EP1997834A1 (en) Catalysts
EP1364974A2 (en) Substituted pyridyl amine ligands, complexes, catalysts and processes for polymerizing and polymers
EP3068810B1 (en) Pyridyldiamido transition metal complexes, production and use thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KM KN KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV LY MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NG NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SM SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005854472

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2005854472

Country of ref document: EP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 05854472

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2